Page 1
Über dieses Buch
Dies ist ein digitales Exemplar eines Buches, das seit Generationen in den Regalen der Bibliotheken aufbewahrt wurde, bevor es von Google imRahmen eines Projekts, mit dem die Bücher dieser Welt online verfügbar gemacht werden sollen, sorgfältig gescannt wurde.
Das Buch hat das Urheberrecht überdauert und kann nun öffentlich zugänglich gemacht werden. Ein öffentlich zugängliches Buch ist ein Buch,das niemals Urheberrechten unterlag oder bei dem die Schutzfrist des Urheberrechts abgelaufen ist. Ob ein Buch öffentlich zugänglich ist, kannvon Land zu Land unterschiedlich sein. Öffentlich zugängliche Bücher sind unser Tor zur Vergangenheit und stellen ein geschichtliches, kulturellesund wissenschaftliches Vermögen dar, das häufig nur schwierig zu entdecken ist.
Gebrauchsspuren, Anmerkungen und andere Randbemerkungen, die im Originalband enthalten sind, finden sich auch in dieser Datei – eine Erin-nerung an die lange Reise, die das Buch vom Verleger zu einer Bibliothek und weiter zu Ihnen hinter sich gebracht hat.
Nutzungsrichtlinien
Google ist stolz, mit Bibliotheken in partnerschaftlicher Zusammenarbeit öffentlich zugängliches Material zu digitalisieren und einer breiten Massezugänglich zu machen. Öffentlich zugängliche Bücher gehören der Öffentlichkeit, und wir sind nur ihre Hüter. Nichtsdestotrotz ist dieseArbeit kostspielig. Um diese Ressource weiterhin zur Verfügung stellen zu können, haben wir Schritte unternommen, um den Missbrauch durchkommerzielle Parteien zu verhindern. Dazu gehören technische Einschränkungen für automatisierte Abfragen.
Wir bitten Sie um Einhaltung folgender Richtlinien:
+ Nutzung der Dateien zu nichtkommerziellen ZweckenWir haben Google Buchsuche für Endanwender konzipiert und möchten, dass Sie dieseDateien nur für persönliche, nichtkommerzielle Zwecke verwenden.
+ Keine automatisierten AbfragenSenden Sie keine automatisierten Abfragen irgendwelcher Art an das Google-System. Wenn Sie Recherchenüber maschinelle Übersetzung, optische Zeichenerkennung oder andere Bereiche durchführen, in denen der Zugang zu Text in großen Mengennützlich ist, wenden Sie sich bitte an uns. Wir fördern die Nutzung des öffentlich zugänglichen Materials für diese Zwecke und können Ihnenunter Umständen helfen.
+ Beibehaltung von Google-MarkenelementenDas "Wasserzeichen" von Google, das Sie in jeder Datei finden, ist wichtig zur Information überdieses Projekt und hilft den Anwendern weiteres Material über Google Buchsuche zu finden. Bitte entfernen Sie das Wasserzeichen nicht.
+ Bewegen Sie sich innerhalb der LegalitätUnabhängig von Ihrem Verwendungszweck müssen Sie sich Ihrer Verantwortung bewusst sein,sicherzustellen, dass Ihre Nutzung legal ist. Gehen Sie nicht davon aus, dass ein Buch, das nach unserem Dafürhalten für Nutzer in den USAöffentlich zugänglich ist, auch für Nutzer in anderen Ländern öffentlich zugänglich ist. Ob ein Buch noch dem Urheberrecht unterliegt, istvon Land zu Land verschieden. Wir können keine Beratung leisten, ob eine bestimmte Nutzung eines bestimmten Buches gesetzlich zulässigist. Gehen Sie nicht davon aus, dass das Erscheinen eines Buchs in Google Buchsuche bedeutet, dass es in jeder Form und überall auf derWelt verwendet werden kann. Eine Urheberrechtsverletzung kann schwerwiegende Folgen haben.
Über Google Buchsuche
Das Ziel von Google besteht darin, die weltweiten Informationen zu organisieren und allgemein nutzbar und zugänglich zu machen. GoogleBuchsuche hilft Lesern dabei, die Bücher dieser Welt zu entdecken, und unterstützt Autoren und Verleger dabei, neue Zielgruppen zu erreichen.Den gesamten Buchtext können Sie im Internet unterhttp://books.google.com durchsuchen.
1
Page 2
This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the information in books and make it universally accessible.
http://books.google.com
Page 3
BOOKSTACKS-
DOCUMENTS
TM 9-2320-272-10
TO 36A12-1C-441
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
TRUCK, 5-TON, 6X6,
M939 SERIES
(DIESEL)
UNIVERSITY OF
ILLINOIS LIBRARY
AT URBANACHAMPAIGN
STACKS
TRUCK CHASSIS: 5 TON. 6X6, M939,
M940, M941, M942, M943. M944, M945;
TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6. DROPSIDE, M923, M925;
TRUCK. CARGO: 5 TON, 6X6, M924, M926;
TRUCK. CARGO 5 TON, 6X6. XLWB, M927, M928,
TRUCK, DUMP: 5 TON, 6X6, M929, M930,
TRUCK TRACTOR: 5 TON, 6X6, M931. M932;
VAN FXPANSIBLE: 5-TON. 6X6, M934, M935;
TRUCK. MFDIUM WRECKER: 5 TON, 6X6. M936
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE
SEPTEMBER 1982
DEPOSITORY
: JRBANA
3 0112101573589aMPAIGN
Page 5
M ; m DNCAT
fmitrin> On- 1 ot
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, DC, 24 AUGUST 1987
TM 9-2320-272-10
INTERIM CHANGE
NO. 101Expires 24 August 1989 -OSITORY
SEP 1 1 1987
UNIVERSITY OP ILLINOIS
AT URRAr iAMPAIQN
llOiOtD Mkl
INTERIM CHANGE
TECHNICAL MANUAL, OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR TRUCK, 5-TON, 6x6,
M939 AND M939A1 SERIES (DIESEL)
Justification : As a result of a recent Safety-of-Use Message
involving missing or loose wheel rim stud or nut. This is an
immediate action change which shall be incorporated immediately.
Expiration: This interim change expires two years from date of
publication and will be destroyed at that time unless sooner
rescinded or superseded by a permanent change.
1. TM 9-2320-272-10 w/C1, 23 Oct 85 is changed as follows:
Page 2-4^: Add the following after item 2c:
CAUTION
If the vehicle is operated with one or more missing or loose
wheel rim stud or nut, possible wheel rim failure may occur.
Change item 2d to 2e and add new weekly item 2d:
Check for loose, missing, or broken wheel rim studs or
nuts. Notify organizational maintenance to repair and
tighten to proper torque.
2. Post this change per DA Pam 3 1 0-1 3 .
3. File this interim change in front of the publication.
(AMSTA-MBT)
r
1
Page 6
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air. Force:
CARLE. VUONO
r . v General, United States Army
~fr . , \S6T r i Chief of Staff
Official:
R.L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General United States Army
The Adjutant General
NORMAN© G. LEZY, Colonel, USAF
Official: Director of Administration
LARRY D. WELCH, General, USAF
Chief of Staff
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38, Truck, Diesel, 5-ton, 6x6, M939 and M939Al-series.
2PIN: 051550-901
Page 7
H> • IWCAT
326- to/Tnf&rim ck I Ox
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, DC, 26 OCTOBER 1987
TM 9-2320-272-10
INTERIM CHANGE
NO. 102
Expires 26 October 1989
INTERIM CHANGE
DEPOSITORY
NOV 2 3 1987
UNlVtKai I i Ji ILLINOIS
AT URBANA-CH4MPAIGN
TM 9-2320-272-10
TECHNICAL MANUAL, OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR TRUCK,
5-TON, 6x6, M939 AND M939A1 SERIES (DIESEL)
Justification: As a result of a recent Safety-of-Use Message
involving adjustment of the spring brake valve lever arm.
Expiration : This interim change expires two years from date of
publication and will be destroyed at that time unless sooner
rescinded or superseded by a permanent change.
1. TM 9-2320-272-10 w/Cl, 23 Oct 85 is changed as follows:
Page 2-45. Delete item 22c.
Page 2-56. Change page 2-56 to 2-56.1/2-56.2 (blank).
NEW Page 2-56. Add the following BEFORE inspections:
c. Adjust parking brake as required by turning knob on top of
brake lever clockwise to increase braking action,
counterclockwise to override braking action. Vehicle is
Non-Mission Capable (NMC) if it moves with parking brake applied
after adjustment. Notify supervisor.
d. Determine parking brake ability to hold vehicle. Depress
override button on dash, apply parking brake and engage
transmission in 1-5 drive. Vehicle should not move at idle.
WARNING
While performing the following check all personnel
must be cleared of front of vehicle. Failure to
do this will result in injury or death.
l
►
Page 8
e. Determine spring brake ability to hold vehicle. Apply
service brake, raise parking brake valve lever, place
transmission in 1-5 drive, gradually increase RPM to 1000,
release service brake. Vehicle should not move.
2. Post this change per DA Pam 310-13.
3. File this interim change in front of the publication.
(AMSTA-MBT)
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, and the Air Force:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official :
R. L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
NORMAND G. LEZY, Colonel, USAF
Director of Administration
Official :
LARRY D. WELCH, General, USAF
Chief of Staff
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38, Operator Maintenance requirements for Truck,
Diesel, 5-ton, 6X6, M939 and M939A1 -series.
2
<r VS. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1987 - 201-A22 - U 1/60 129 PIN: 051550-902
Page 9
CHANGE
B00KSTACKS
DOCUMENTS
NO. 1
TM 9-2320-272-10/TO 36A12-1C-441
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY
AND THE AIR FORCE
WASHINGTON, DC, 14 March 1983
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FOR
5-TON M939 SERIES TRUCKS (DIESEL)
TRUCK, CHASSIS: 5-TON, 6X6, M939
M940, M941, M942, M943, M944, M945;
TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6, DROPSIDE, M923, M925;
TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6, M924, M926;
TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6, XLWB, M927, M928;
TRUCK, DUMP: 5-TON, 6X6, M929, M930;
TRUCK, TRACTOR: 5-TON, 6X6, M931, M932;
VAN EXPANSIBLE: 5-TON, 6X6, M934, M935;
TRUCK, MEDIUM WRECKER: 5-TON, 6X6, M936
DEPOSITORY
APR 1 4 1983
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
TM 9-2320-272-10/TO 36A12- 1C-441, 30 September 1982, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed
material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. Added or
revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the illustration.
Remove pages Insert pages
i and ii
v and vi
vii and viii
1-1 and 1-2
1-5 through 1-18
1-23 through 1-26
2- 3 through 2-10
2-13 and 2-14
2-17 and 2-18
2-29 through 2-34
2-39 through 2-76
2-79 through 2-88
2-93 through 2-96
2-99 through 2-102
2-105 through 2-124
18
i and ii
v and vi
vii and viii
1-1 and 1-2
1-5 through 1
1-23 through 1-26
2- 3 through 2-10
2-13 and 2-14
2-17 and 2-18
2-29 through 2-34
2-39 through 2-76
2-79 through 2-88
2-93 through 2-96
2-99 through 2-102
2-105 through 2-124
Remove pages Insert pages
2-127 and 2-128
2-133 and 2-134
2-137 through 2-144
2-149 through 2-152
2- 157 through 2-172
3-3 through 3-6
3-9 through 3-20
3-25 through 3-28
3-39 through 3-42
A-1
B-1 through B-37
C-1 through C-4
D-1 through D-4
Index 1 through 8
2-127 and 2-128
2-133 and 2-134
2-137 through 2-144
2-149 through 2-152
2- 157 through 2-172
3-3 through 3-6
3-9 through 3-20
3-25 through 3-28
3-39 through 3-42
A-1
B-l through B-37
C-1 through C-4
D-1 through D-4
Index 1 through 8
2. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes
Page 10
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force:
TM 9-2320-272-10/TO 36A12-I
Official:
E. C. MEYER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
ROBERT M. JOYCE
Major General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Official:
CHARLES A GABRIEL. General, USAF
Chief of 'Staff
JAMES L. WYATT, JR., Colonel, USAF
Director of Administration
Distribution
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38 Operator Maintenance requirements
for Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M939 Series (Diesel) .
14 MARCH 1983
Page 11
^)oi,/j:
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
EXHAUST GASES CAN KILL!
1. Do not operate your vehicle engine in enclosed areas.
2. Do not idle vehicle engine with cab windows closed.
3. Do not drive vehicle with inspection plates or cover plates off.
4. Be alert at all times for exhaust odors.
5. Be alert for exhaust poisoning symptoms. They are:
• headache
• dizziness
• sleepiness
• loss of muscular control
6. If you see another person with exhaust poisoning symptoms:
• remove person from area
• expose to open air
• keep person warm
• do not permit person to move
• administer artificial respiration, if necessary*
• notify a medic
THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST EXHAUST POISONING IS
ADEQUATE VENTILATION.
WARNING SUMMARY
• Drycleaning solvent is flammable and will not be used near an open flame. A fire
extinguisher will be kept nearby when the solvent is used. Use only in well-
ventilated places. Failure to do this may result in injury to personnel and or
damage to equipment.
• Do not touch hot exhaust pipes with bare hands. Severe burns will result.
• Do not perform fuel system check or inspections while smoking or near fire, flame,
or sparks. Fuel could ignite, causing damage to vehicle, severe injury, or death.
• Don't smoke, have open flames, or make sparks around the batteries, especially if
the caps are off. They can explode and cause injury.
• Stay clear of dump body and cab protector at all times during loading and
unloading operations. The dump body can unexpectedly raise when overloaded or
when a heavy load is dropped into the dump body. This can result in serious
injury.
• Always lower outriggers before operating.
• Do not put vehicle in motion until warning light and buzzer stop. Air pressure
gages and should indicate at least 90 psi (620.5 kPa). If warnings continue beyond
three minutes and or pressure gages do not reach 90 psi (620.5 kPa). turn ignition
switch and battery switch to OFF positions and notify organizational maintenance.
A
Page 12
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING SUMMARY (Cont'd)
• Do not coast downhill with transmission in "N" (neutral). Vehicle may go out of
control.
• Do not remove surge tank filler cap if temperature gage reads above I95°F (90°C).
Do not add coolant when engine is hot unless engine is running. Add coolant
slowly.
• Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not allow cable to run through
hands. Broken wire cause painful injuries.
• Direct all personnel to stand clear of cable. A snapped cable can cause serious
injuries.
• Do not operate winch at high speeds. Do not operate winch at erratic speeds. High
speed or erratic winding can result in a snapped cable.
• Do not lower load without a ground guide. Direct all personnel to stand clear of
lifting operation. Swinging loads can cause serious injury.
• Vehicle will become charged with electricity if A-frame contacts or breaks high
voltage wire. Do not leave vehicle while high voltage line is in contact with A-frame
or vehicle. Serious or fatal injury can result. Signal nearby personnel to have
electrical power turned off.
• Make certain spike cable ring terminal makes good contact with bare metal. If
necessary, scrape clean contact area of dirt, paint, or rust.
• Do not continue with coupling operation if trailer air supply valve fails to engage.
Disconnect air couplings and notify organizational maintenance.
• Make sure troopseat securing pins are engaged before lowering dropside.
• On dropside trucks, make certain forward end of dropsides are engaged before
lowering tailgate.
• Do not operate vehicle on wet, smooth roads with lowered tire inflation. Do not
operate at too great a speed for road conditions. Low tire inflation or excessive
speeds may result in loss of vehicle control on wet. smooth roads.
• Make sure vehicle hand brake is set and wheels are chocked before releasing
springs in spring brakes. Failure to do so may result in vehicle rolling out of
control.
• Exhaust gases can kill. Do not operate engine coolant heater in closed area
occupied by personnel.
• Ground spike must be driven into ground 18 to 24 inches (46 to 61 centimeters)
and spike cable connected to the chassis before power can be taken from outside
source.
B
Page 13
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING SUMMARY (Cont'd)
• Do not rely on service brakes until they dry out. Keep applying brakes until uneven
braking ceases.
• Keep tire from swinging. Serious injury can be caused if personnel are struck by a
swinging tire.
• Keep fingers out from under or directly above the locking end of securing latches
during removal or installation. Serious injury can result if fingers are caught
beneath latches and/ or if fingers are struck by latch when unsnapped.
• Do not open hinged roof and floor panel from outside the van. Push open roof and
floor panel from inside van only.
• Vehicle operation in snow is a hazardous condition. Operators must travel at
reduced speeds and be prepared to meet sudden changes in road conditions and
traffic speeds. Maintain safe stopping distances.
• Block vehicle wheels if operating site is on a grade, no matter how slight.
• Do not attempt to cross water deeper than 78 inches (198 centimeters). Limit
vehicle speed while fording to 3 or 4 miles per hour (5 or 6 kilometers per hour).
• Alcohol used in alcohol evaporator is flammable, poisonous, and explosive. Do not
smoke when adding fluid. Do not drink fluid.
• Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on ice or snow. Sudden stops will
cause vehicle wheels to lock, engine to stall and loss of steering.
c
Page 15
TM 9-2320-272-10
TO 36A12-1C-441
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. 9-2320-272-10
TEHNICAL ORDER
NO. 36A12-1C-441
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, DC 14 MARCH 1983
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FOR
5-TON M939 SERIES TRUCKS (DIESEL)
MODEL NSN WITHOUT WINCH NSN WITH WINCH
Chassis M939 2320-01-048-2450
Chassis M939 2320-01-047-8744
Chassis M940 2320-01-047-8743
Chassis M941 2320-01-047-8741
Chassis M941 2320-01-047-8742
Chassis M942 2320-01-047-8738
Chassis M942 2320-01-047-8739
Chassis M943 2320-01-047-8740
Chassis M944 2320-01-047-8745
Chassis M945 2320-01-050-4894
Truck, Cargo, Dropside M923 2320-01-050-2084
Truck, Cargo, Dropside M925 2320-01-047-8769
Truck, Cargo M924 2320-01-047-8773
Truck, Cargo M926 2320-01-047-8772
Truck, Cargo, XLWB M927 2320-01-047-8771
Truck, Cargo, XLWB M928 2320-01-047-8770
Truck, Dump M929 2320-01-047-8756
Truck, Dump M930 2320-01-047-8755
Truck, Tractor M931 2320-01-047-8753
Truck, Tractor M932 2320-01-047-8752
Van, Expansible M934 2320-01-047-8750
Van, Expansible, WHLG M935 2320-01-047-8751
Truck, Medium Wrecker M936 2320-01-047-8754
REPORTING OF ERRORS
You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know
of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter,
DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms),
or DA Form 2028-2 located in back of this manual direct to: Commander,
U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Command, ATTN: DRSTA-MB, Warren,
Michigan 48090. A reply will be furnished to you.
TA 092258
Change 1
Page 16
TM 9-2320-272-10
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
All abbreviations that appear in this manual are listed below.
BO Blackout
BRT Bright
CC , Cross Country
CW Chain (and) Wire Rope (lubricating oil)
DA Department of Army
DFA Diesel Fuel (arctic)
EIR'S Equipment Improvement Recommendations
GAA Grease Automotive & Artillery
GO ; Gear Oil
GOS Gear Oil (sub-zero)
H Highway
LO Lubrication Order
MAC Maintenance Allocation Charts
NSN National Stock Number
OE/HDO Oil, Engine/ Heavy Duty Oil
OEA Oil, Engine (arctic)
Para Paragraph
PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks & Services
PSI Pounds Per Square Inch
RPM Revolutions (turns) Per Minute
TM Technical Manual
WHLG With Hydraulic Lift Gate
WO/W Without Winch
W/W With Winch
XLWB Extra Long Wheel Base
CM Centimeter
FT Foot
G Gram
GAI Gallon
IN Inch
KM Kilometer
kPa Kilopascals
L Liter
LB Pound
LB-FT Pound-Feet
M Meter
MI Mile
MPG Miles Per Gallon
MPH Miles Per Hour
N»m Newton-Meters
PSI Per Square Inch
PT Pint
QT Quart
YD Yard
TA 090076
ii
Page 17
TM 9-2320-272-10
MILITARY TERMS AND COMMON TERMS
CROSS REFERENCE LIST
The following is an alphabetical list of commonly used military terms that appear in
this manual. This list is eross-reicrcnccd to commonly understood terms used in
everyday speech that mean the same thing.
Engine Coolant Anti-freeze/ water
Exhaust Stack Tailpipe
Failsafe Unit Warning buzzer
Fording Crossing through water
Grade Steepness of hill
Hydraulics Operated by oil pressure
Inclement Weather Bad weather (rain, snow, high winds)
Indicators Gages, warning lights, etc.
Mired Stuck in mud or snow
Operation Task
Operator Driver
Slaving Jumping batteries
Splash Shields Mud flaps
Transport To carry
Turning Radius Distance needed to make a U-turn
Usual Conditions Good roads, good weather
Para Page
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ii
MILITARY TERMS/COMMON TERMS iii
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
Section I. General information
Scope 1-1 1-1
Forms and records 1-2 1-2
II. Description and data
General Description 1-3 1-3
Designations 1-4 1-3
Cargo trucks w/dropsides 1-5 1-4
Cargo trucks 1-6 1-6
Cargo trucks w/ extra long wheel bases 1-7 1-8
Dump trucks 1-8 1-10
Tractor trucks 1-9 1-12
Medium wrecker 1-10 1-14
Expansible vans 1-11 1-16
Tabulated data 1-12 1-18
CHAPTER 2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. Controls and indicators
Know your controls and indicators 2-1 2-1
Preparation for use 2-2 2-1
Chassis controls and indicators 2-3 2-2
TA 090077
iii
Page 18
TM 9-2320-272-10
Para Page
Bodv equipment controls, and indicators 2-4 2-13
Medium wrecker 2-4a 2-13
Dump trucks 2-4b 2-17
Cargo trucks 2-4c 2-19
Tractor trucks 2-4d 2-20
Expansible van 2-4e 2-21
Special kits, controls, and indicators 2-5 2-28
A-frame kit 2-5a 2-28
Airbrake kit 2-5b 2-28
Electric brake kit 2-5c 2-29
Arctic winterization kit 2-5d 2-29
Deep water fording kit 2-5e 2-32
Troopseat and paulin kit 2-5f 2-33
Machine gun mount kit 2-5g 2-34
Rifle mount kit 2-5h 2-34
Section II. Preventive maintenance checks and services
General 2-6 2-35
Cleaning instructions and precautions 2-7 2-35
Operator/ crew preventive maintenance
checks and services (PMCS) 2-8 2-37
Oil and gasket leakage 2-9 2-38
II1. Operation under usual conditions
General . . 2-10 2-67
Starting the engine (above +32° F) (0°C ) 2-11 2-67
Cold weather starting (below +32° F) (0°C) 2-12 2-70
Placing and sustaining vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72
Stopping the vehicle and engine 2-14 2-76
Using slave receptacle to start engine 2-15 2-78
Operation of vehicle service lights 2-16 2-79
Raising and securing cab hood 2-17 2-81
General 2- 17a 2-81
Raising and securing hood 2- 17b 2-81
Removing cab top and lowering windshield 2-18 2-82
Operation of front winch 2-19 2-84
Preparation for use 2- 19a 2-84
Unwinding winch cable 2-19b 2-84
Rigging the load 2- 1 9c 2-85
Pulling load 2-19d 2-86
Pulling indirect loads 2-19e 2-87
l ilting and lowering loads 2-19f 2-88
After winch operation 2-1 9g 2-88
Preparing winch for travel 2- 1 9h 2-89
Operation of cargo trucks 2-20 2-90
General 2-20a 2-90
Lowering tailgate 2-20b 2-90
Lowering and raising troopseats 2-20c 2-90
Removing front and side racks 2-20d 2-91
Installing front and side racks 2-20e 2-92
Lowering and raising dropsides 2-20f 2-92
Operation of medium wrecker 2-21 2-94
TA 090078
iv
Page 19
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
1 Para Page
General 2-2 la 2-94
Front winch operation 2-2 lb 2-94
Rear winch operation 2-2 1c 2-94
Crane operation 2-2 Id 2-100
Towing with wrecker crane 2-2 1 e 2-106
Securing crane after operation 2-2 1 f 2-108
Operation of dump trucks 2-22 2-1 10
Payload capacities 2-22a 2-110
Regular dump operation 2-22b 2-1 1 1
Rocker type dump operation 2-22c 2-1 12
Spreader type dump operation 2-22d 2-113
Operation of tractor and fifth wheel 2-23 2-115
General 2-23a 2-115
Wedge adjustment 2-23b 2-115
Coupling semitrailer 2-23c 2-116
Uncoupling semitrailer 2-23d 2-1 19
Operation of expansible van trucks 2-24 2-122
General 2-24a 2-122
Selecting operating site 2-24b 2-122
Leveling van body 2-24c 2-122
Power lift gate operation 2-24d 2-122
Expanding van body 2-24e 2-124
Operating van electrical system 2-24f 2-128
Operating van heaters 2-24g 2-129
Operating van air conditioner 2-24h 2-130
Blackout operations 2-24i 2-131
Operating power lift gate 2-24j 2-132
Retracting van body 2-24k 2-133
Operation of auxiliary equipment (special purpose kits) 2-25 2-137
General 2-25a 2-137
Operating instructions 2-25b 2-137
Deep water fording kit 2-26 2-138
General 2-26a 2-138
Operator preparation for fording 2-26b 2-138
Fording operation 2-26c 2-139
After fording operation 2-26d 2-140
Troopseat kit 2-27 2-141
General 2-27a# 2-141
Troopseat kit installation 2-27b 2-141
Bow and tarp kit 2-28 2-14? I
Bow and tarp kit installation 2-28a 2-14? I
Raising paulin for ventilation 2-28b 2-145
Bow and tarp kit removal 2-28c 2-145
Arctic winterization kit 2-29 2-149
General 2-29a 2-149
Operating engine compartment covers 2-29b 2-149
Operating fuel burning personnel heater 2-29c 2-150
Operating engine coolant heater 2-29d 2-152
A-frame kit 2-30 2-156
General 2-30a 2-156
Preparation for use 2-30b 2-156
TA 092259
Change 1 v
Page 20
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
Para Page
Operating A-frame 2-30c 2-156
Electric brake kit 2-31 2-157
General 2-3 la 2-157
Setting rheostat 2-3 lb 2-157
Electric brake kit operation 2-3 lc 2-157
Airbrake control kit 2-32 2-158
General 2-32a 2-158
Airbrake kit operation 2-32b 2-158
Section IV. Operation under unusual conditions
Special instructions 2-33 2-159
General 2-33a 2-159
Cleaning 2-33b 2-159
Lubrication 2-3 3c 2-159
Driving instructions 2-33d 2-159
Special purpose kits 2-33e 2-159
Reporting materiel failure 2-33f 2-159
Operating in extreme cold 2-34 2-160
General 2-34a 2-160
Before operation 2-34b 2-160
Starting engine 2-34c 2-160
Driving vehicle 2-34d 2-161
Halting or parking 2-34e 2-161
Operating in snow 2-35 2-164
General 2-35a 2-164
Driving vehicle 2-35b 2-164
After operation 2-35c 2-165
Operating in extreme heat 2-36 2-166
General 2-36a 2-166
Before operation 2-36b 2-166
Driving vehicle 2-36c 2-166
Halting or parking 2-36d 2-168
Operating in dusty, sandy areas 2-37 2-168
General 2-37a 2-168
Driving vehicle 2-37b 2-168
Halting or parking 2-37c 2-168
Operating under rainy or humid conditions 2-38 2-169
General 2-38a 2-169
Driving vehicle 2-38b 2-169
Operating in deep mud 2-39 2-170
General 2-39a 2-170
Driving vehicle 2-39b 2-170
After operation 2-39c 2-170
Operating in salt water 2-40 2-171
General 2-40a 2-171
Preparation for fording 2-40b 2-171
Fording operation in salt water 2-40c 2-171
After fording operation 2-40d 2-172
CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section 1. Tools and equipment
Special tools and equipment 3-1 3-1
TA 090080
vi
Page 21
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table of Contents (Cont'd) Para Page
Basic issue items 3-2 3-1
Expendable supplies and materials 3-3 3-1
Section 11. Lubrication
Lubrication order 3-4 3-1
General lubrication instructions 3-5 3-1
General lubricating instructions under unusal
conditions 3-6 3-1
Lubrication for continued operation below 0°F (-17°C) . 3-7 3-2
Section 111. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures 3-8 3-2
Scope 3-8a 3-2
Omissions 3-8b 3-2
Section IV. Maintenance procedures
General 3-9 3-28
Engine service 3-10 3-28
General 3- 10a 3-28
Engine crankcase oil level 3- 10b 3-28
Coolant surge tank 3-1 0c 3-29
Power steering reservoir 3-1 Od 3-29
Fuel filter 3-10e 3-29
Air cleaner 3-1 Of 3-31
Air reservoirs 3-11 3-33
General 3-1 la 3-33
Service 3-1 lb 3-33
Final inspection 3-1 1c 3-33
Transmission oil level 3-12 3-33
General 3- 12a 3-33
Checking oil level 3- 12b 3-33
Wheels and tires 3-13 3-34
General 3- 13a 3-34
Spare tire removal 3- 13b 3-34
Tire removal 3- 13c 3-35
Replacement 3- 13d 3-37
Tire inflation 3-14 3-38
General 3- 14a 3-38
Tire gaging 3- 14b 3-38
Tire inflation 3- 14c 3-38
Brake service 3-15 3-39
General 3- 15a 3-39
Type of brake 3- 15b 3-39
Releasing the spring 3- 15c 3-39
Radiator fan clutch emergency service 3-16 3-40
General 3- 16a 3-40
Symptoms 3- 16b 3-41
Inspection 3- 16c 3-41
Emergency service 3-16d 3-41
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES
Publication indexes A-l A-l
Military publications A-1 A-1
Other publications A-2 A-1
Technical manuals A-2a A-1
Technical bulletins A-2b A-1
TA 092260
Change 1 vii
Page 22
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
Para Page
Cold weather operations A-2c A-1
Lubrication orders A-2d A- 1
Destruction to prevent enemy use A-2e A-1
General A-2f A-1
APPENDIX B. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST
AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
Section I. Introduction
Scope B-1 B-1
General B-2 B-l
Integral components of the end item B-2a B-1
Basic issue items B-2b B-1
Explanation of columns B-3 B-1
Item number B-3a B- 1
National stock number B-3b B-1
Description B-3c B-1
Federal supply code for manufacturer (FSCM) B-3d B-1
Part number B-3e B-2
Usable on code B-3f B-2
Quantity required B-3g B-2
Abbreviations B-4 B-3
Section II. Integral components of end item list
General B-5 B-3
Section III. Basic issue items list
General B-6 B-3
APPENDIX C. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Introduction
Scope C-1 C-1
General C-2 C-1
Explanation of listing C-3 C-l
Descriptions, national stock numbers,
and part numbers C-3a C-1
Unit of measurement C-3b C-l
Quantity authorized C-3c C-l
Additional authorization list C-2
APPENDIX D. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
Introduction
Scope D-1 D-1
Explanation of columns D-2 D-1
Item number D-2a D-1
Level of maintenance D-2b D-1
National stock number D-2c D-1
Description D-2d D-l
Unit of measure (U/M) D-2e D-1
Expendable supplies and materials list D-2
TA 090082
viii
Page 23
TM 9-2320-272-10
CHAPTER 1
I INTRODUCTION
Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1. Scope.
a. This manual contains instructions for operating and servicing M939 series
vehicles. These vehicles are:
(1) M923 Cargo Truck, WO/W (Dropside)
(2) M924 Cargo Truck, WO/W
(3) M925 Cargo Truck, W/W (Dropside)
(4) M926 Cargo Truck, W/W
(5) M927 Cargo Truck, WO/W (XLWB)
(6) M928 Cargo Truck, W/W (XLWB)
(7) M929 Dump Truck, WO/W
(<SJ M930 Dump Truck, W/W
f9J M931 Tractor Truck, WO/W
(10) M932 Tractor Truck, W/W
(11) M934 Expansible Van, WO/W
(12) M935 Expansible Van, WO/W (WHLG)
(13) M936 Medium Wrecker, W/W
6. The material presented here provides operators with information and procedures
needed to provide the safest and most efficient operation of these vehicles. This
information includes:
(1) Descriptions of each vehicle and its operation.
(2) The purpose of each vehicle.
(3) Vehicle limitations such as load limits.
(4) Cautions and warnings to operators regarding safety to personnel and
equipment.
TA 092261
Change 1 1-1
Page 24
TM 9-2320-272-10
(5) The function of all panel controls and indicators.
(6) The function of all body controls and indicators.
(7) How and when to use special purpose kits such as the deep water fording kit.
(8) Operator maintenance checks and service procedures.
(9) Troubleshooting procedures to be followed by operators if the vehicle
malfunctions.
(10) Operator forms and records.
NOTE
Operator maintenance is preventive maintenance. It is the duty of
each operator to keep the vehicle operational. These duties
consist of maintenance checks, servicing the vehicle, and simple
troubleshooting. They are not mechanical repairs. Mechanical
repairs of M939 series vehicles are accomplished at the
organizational maintenance level or higher.
1-2. Forms and Records.
a. Vehicle Maintenance Forms and Records. The forms and records that must be
kept up to date by operators are those prescribed by TM 38-750.
b. Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR). EIR's can and must be
submitted by anyone who is aware of an unsatisfactory condition with equipment
design or use. It is not necessary to show a new design or list a better way to perform a
procedure. Simply tell why the current design is unfavorable or why a procedure is
difficult. EIR's can be submitted on DA form SF368 (quality deficiency report). Mail
directly to: Commander, U.S. Army Tank Automotive Command, ATTN: DRSTA-M,
Warren, Michigan 48090. A reply will be furnished to you.
c. Hand Receipt Manual. The hand receipt manual (TM 9-2320-272- 1 0-HR) is a
companion document to this publication. It consists of preprinted hand receipts (DA
form 2062) that list end item related equipment (i.e., COEI, BII, and AAL) you must
account for. As an aid to property accountability, additional -HR manuals may be
requistioned from the following source in accordance with procedures in chapter 3,
AR 310-2: The U.S. Army Adjutant General Publications Center, 1655 Woodson Road,
St. Louis, MO 631 1 4.
TA 092262
1-2 Change 1
Page 25
TM 9-2320-272-10
Section II. DESCRIPTION AND DATA
1-3. General Description.
a. The 5-Ton, 6x6, M939 series of trucks are tactical vehicles designed for use on all
types of roads, highways and cross-country terrain. These trucks also operate in
extreme temperatures such as arctic weather conditions. The M939 series trucks are an
improved version of the M809 series trucks. The improvements make M939 trucks
more reliable and easier to operate. These major improvements are:
(1) An Automatic Transmission
(2) An Improved Power Steering System
(3) A Complete Air Brake System
(4) An Improved Cooling System
(5) An Improved Electrical System
(6) A 3-Crew Member Cab
(7) A Tilt Hood
(8) A Hydraulically Powered Front Winch
b. All vehicles in the M939 series employ the same 250 horsepower engine and the
same automatic transmission. Truck cabs have removable canvas tops. Cargo trucks in
the series are provided with bows, removable canvas tops, and end flaps. All vehicles
are equipped with a spare wheel mounted rear of cab and a pintle hook used for
towing.
1-4. Designations.
a. These trucks are called 5-ton. 6x6. M939 series vehicles.
(1) The "5-ton" refers to the vehicles1 load limit rating.
(2) The "6x6" means that each vehicle has six wheel ends and all six are capable of
driving.
(3) The "M939" is simply a code number given to this series of trucks to
distinguish this series from others.
b. The 5-ton load limit rating of M939 series trucks does not mean these trucks are
limited to 5-ton payloads. A vehicle rating only indicates the maximum amount of
cargo weight the vehicle's axles and frame can withstand when operating under the
worst cross-country conditions. Under good conditions such as an improved highway,
these trucks can safely carry payloads up to two times the rated payload.
TA 090085
1-3
Page 26
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-5. Cargo Trucks With Dropsides: M923 WO/W and M925 W/W.
M923 WO/W
M925 W/W
TA 090086
1-4
Page 27
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Differences. The only difference between the M923 cargo truck and M925 cargo
truck is that the M923 does not have a front winch and the M925 does. This difference
affects:
• Vehicle Length
• Vehicle Weight
• Shipping Dimensions
• Turning Radius
• Approach Angle
• Special Winch-Assisted Operations
it docs not affect the basic purpose or performance of the vehicles.
b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M923 and M925 dropside cargo trucks are used to
transport payloads of up to 20,000 pounds (9.080 kilograms) on the highway and 10,000
pounds (4.540 kilograms) cross country. Fully loaded, each will tow an additional
trailer load of up to 30,000 pounds (13.620 kilograms) on the highway and 15.000
pounds (6,810 kilograms) cross country. Both truck bodies provide 550 cubic feet (15.4
cubic meters) of cargo space. Their hinged steel sides fold down and out of the way of
loading and unloading operations. Troop seats may be positioned for troop transport
operations. The M925 is equipped with a front winch. This feature makes it more
versatile for operations under difficult field conditions.
c. Performance. Fully loaded M923 and M925 dropside cargo trucks can achieve a
maximum speed of 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). They will climb road
grades as steep as 23 degrees with maximum bed and trailer loads. Without loads, they
will handle grades up to 34 degrees. The vehicles ford hard-bottom water crossings up
to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 78 inches
(198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Their maximum cruising range with fully-loaded beds
and trailers is 300 miles (483 kilometers). Without trailers, the vehicles cover 350 miles
(563 kilometers) per tank of diesel fuel. The turning radius of the M923 is 38 feet
( 1 1 .6 meters). The turning radius of the M925 truck is 39 feet (11.9 meters).
d. Special Limitations. None.
e. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (c. cargo
trucks).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-20. operation of cargo trucks.
(3) Refer to paragraph 2-28. bow and tarp kit.
TA 092263
Change 1 1-5
Page 28
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-6. Cargo Trucks: M924 WO/W and M926 W/W
M924 WO/W
M926 W/W
TA 090088
1-6
Page 29
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Differences. The only difference between the M924 cargo truck and the M926
cargo truck is that the M924 does not have a front winch and the M926 does. This
difference affects:
• Vehicle Length
• Vehicle Weight
• Shipping Dimensions
' • Turning Radius
• Approach Angle
• Special Winch-Assisted Operations.
It does not affect the basic purpose, performance, or special limitations of the
vehicles.
b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M924 and M926 cargo trucks are used to transport
equipment, materials, and/or personnel. These trucks are the same basic trucks as the
M923 and M925 cargo trucks. However. M924 and M926 cargo trucks have permanent
steel-welded sides. For this reason, they are preferred vehicles for use in transporting
bulky payloads that may shift weight during transit. M924 and M926 load limits on
highways and cross country are the same as those of M923 and M925. Both trucks
provide 550 cubic feet (15.4 cubic meters) of cargo space. Both use a troop seat kit for
troop transport operations. The M926 is equipped with a front winch. This feature
makes the M926 truck more versatile for operations under difficult field conditions.
c. Performance. The performance characteristics are the same as those of the cargo
trucks with dropsides. The turning radius of the M924 truck is 38 feet (1 1.6 meters). The
turning radius of the M926 truck is 39 feet (I 1.9 meters).
(/. Special Limitations. M924 and M926 cargo trucks are not suited for operations
that require easy side access to cargo. An example of this is a ground-to-truck forklift
operation. In such an operation, cargo trucks with dropsides are preferred.
e. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4. body equipment, controls, and indicators (c. cargo
trucks).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-20. operation of cargo trucks.
(3) Refer to paragraph 2-28. bow and tarp kit.
TA 092264
Change 1 1-7
Page 30
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-7. Cargo Trucks With Extra Long Wheel Bases (XLWB): M927 WO/W and
M928 W/W.
M927 WO/W
M928 W/W
TA 090090
1-8
Page 31
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Differences. The only difference between the M927 cargo truck (XLWB) arid
M928 cargo truck (XLWB) is that the M927 does not have a front winch and the M928
does. This difference affects:
• Vehicle Length
• Vehicle Weight
• Shipping Dimensions
• Turning Radius
• Approach Angle
• Special Winch-Assisted Operations
It does not affect the basic purpose, performance, or special limitations of the
vehicles.
b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M927 and M928 cargo trucks have the same load
capacities as those of the M923, M924, M925, and M926 cargo trucks already
discussed. However, truck beds on M927 and M928 vehicles are 76 inches (193
centimeters) longer. This provides each vehicle with 194 more cubic feet (5.4 cubic
meters) of cargo space. M927 and M928 cargo trucks are specifically designed to
transport equipment and materials that take up more cargo space per pound. The total
cargo space provided by M927 and M928 cargo trucks is 744 cubic feet (20.8 cubic
meters). The vehicles have permanent steel-welded sides. Troop seats may be positioned
for troop transport operations. The M928 is equipped with a front winch. This feature
makes it more versatile under difficult field conditions.
c Performance. Fully loaded, M927 and M928 cargo trucks will climb road grades
as steep as 21 degrees. Without trailer loads, they will handle grades up to 31 degrees.
Their maximum speeds, fording depths and miles they will go per tank of fuel are the
same as the M923, M924, M925, and M926 cargo trucks. The turning radius of the
M927 truck is 45 feet 2 inches (13.8 meters). The turning radius of the M928 truck is 46
feet 2 inches (14.1 meters).
d. Special Limitations. M927 and M928 cargo trucks are not suited for operations
requiring easy side access to cargo or maneuverability in limited spaces because of their
longer lengths.
e. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (c. cargo
trucks).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-20, operation of cargo trucks.
(3) Refer to paragraph 2-28, bow and tarp kit.
TA 092265
Change 1 1-9
Page 32
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-8. Dump Trucks: M929 WO/W and M930 W/W.
M929 WO/W
M930 W/W
TA 090092
1-10
Page 33
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Differences. The only difference between the M929 dump truck and the M930
dump truck is that the M929 does not have a front winch and the M930 does. This
difference affects:
• Vehicle Length
• Vehicle Weight
• Shipping Dimensions
• Turning Radius
• Approach Angle
• Special, Winch-Assisted Operations
It does not affect the basic purpose, performance, or special limitations of the
vehicles.
b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M929 and M930 dump trucks are used to transport
materials such as sand, gravel, and stone. They may also haul scrap, rubble or other
waste materials. These vehicles operate on or off the road with load limits up to 20,000
pounds (9,080 kilograms) on the highway and 10,000 pounds (4,540 kilograms) cross
country. Fully loaded, these vehicles can tow trailers with additional loads up to 30,000
pounds (13,620 kilograms) on the highway and 15,000 pounds (6,810 kilograms) cross
country. Each vehicle has a welded-steel dump body. The forward end of the solid
dump body extends up and over the vehicle cab to protect it from damage during
loading. Troop seats may be positioned for troop transport operations. The M930 is
equipped with a front winch. This feature makes it more versatile under difficult field
conditions.
c. Performance. Under maximum loads, M929 and M930 dump trucks climb road
grades as steep as 17 degrees. Without trailer loads, they handle grades up to 30 degrees.
Maximum speed is 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). The vehicles can ford
hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a deep water
fording kit and 78 inches (198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Both trucks are equipped with
dual fuel tanks. This extends the cruising range of these vehicles to 400 miles (644
kilometers) with loads and 480 miles (772 kilometers) empty. The turning radius of the
M929 truck is 35 feet 6 inches (10.9 meters). The turning radius of the M930 truck is
36 feet 6 inches (11.2 meters).
d. Special Limitations. None.
e. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (b. dump
trucks).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-22, operation of dump trucks.
(3) Refer to paragraph 2-27, troopseat kit.
(4) Refer to paragraph 2-28, bow and tarp kit.
TA 092266
Change 1 1-11
Page 34
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-9. Tractor Trucks: M931 WO/W and M932 W/W.
M931 WO/W
M932 W/W
TA 090094
1-12
Page 35
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Differences. The only difference between the M931 tractor truck and the M932
tractor truck is that the M931 does not have a front winch and the M932 does. This
difference affects:
• Vehicle Length
• Vehicle Weight
• Shipping Dimensions
• Turning Radius
• Approach Angle
• Special Winch-Assisted Operations
It does not affect the basic purpose, performance, or special limitations of the
vehicles.
b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M931 and M932 tractor trucks are fifth wheel vehicles
used to haul semitrailer loads up to 37,500 pounds (17,025 kilograms) cross country and
55,000 pounds (24,970 kilograms) on the highway. Each vehicle is also equipped with a
pintle hook for hauling eye-hook trailer loads up to 15,000 pounds (6,810 kilograms)
cross country and 30,000 pounds (13,620 kilograms) on the highway. The M932 tractor
truck is equipped with a front winch. This feature makes it more versatile in tactical
operations under difficult field conditions.
c. Performance. Fully loaded, M931 and M932 tractor trucks reach a maximum
speed of 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). They will climb road grades as
steep as 23 degrees with fully loaded semitrailers. The vehicles can ford hard bottom
water crossings up to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and
78 inches (198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Their maximum cruising range fully loaded is
300 miles (483 kilometers). Without trailers, these trucks will cover 350 miles (563
kilometers) per tank of diesel fuel. The turning radius of the M931 is 35 feet 6 inches
(10.9 meters). The turning radius of the M932 is 36 feet 6 inches (1 1.2 meters).
d. Special Limitations. Fifth wheel cannot pivot more than 21 degrees up, 15 degrees
down or 7 degrees sideways. For this reason, semitrailer operations cross country are
limited to easy grades over known terrain.
e. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (d. tractors).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-23, operation of tractor and fifth wheel.
TA 092267
Change 1 1-13
Page 36
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-10. Medium Wrecker: M936 W/W.
M936 W/W (LEFT SIDE VIEW)
M936 W/W (RIGHT SIDE VIEW)
TA 090096
1-14
Page 37
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M936 medium wrecker is used to return disabled
vehicles lor repair. It is also used to free mired vehicles and in crane operations of up
to 20.000 pounds (9.080 kilograms). Some examples of M936 crane operations are:
(1) Removing and replacing engines, power packs, and gun tubes.
(2) Loading and unloading of munitions such as missiles.
b. Performance. With or without a towed load, the M936 medium wrecker will reach
a maximum speed of 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). The truck is equipped
with dual fuel tanks. These two tanks extend the vehicle's cruising ranges to 400 miles
(644 kilometers) with a towed load and 500 miles (804 kilometers) without. While
towing, this vehicle will climb road grades as steep as 1 7 degrees. Without a load, it can
handle grades as steep as 25 degrees. The vehicle's wrecker crane rotates 270 degrees
with 45 degrees of elevation. Turning radius of the M936 is 39 feet (I 1.9 meters).
c. Special Limitations. The crane and winch load limits of the M936 wrecker arc:
(1) Crane fw/outriggers) 20.000 lbs. ( 9.080 kg.)
(2) Front winch 20.000 lbs. ( 9.080 kg.)
(3) Rear winch 45.000 lbs. (20.250 kg.)
(I. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4. body equipment, controls, and indicators (a. medium
wrecker).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-21. operation of medium wrecker.
TA 092268
Change 1 1-15
Page 38
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-11. Expansible Vans: M 934 and M935.
M934
M935 (WHLG)
TA 092269
1-16 Change 1
Page 39
TM 9-2320-272-10
a. Differences. The only difference between the M934 expansible van and the M935
expansible van is that the M934 does not have a rear hydraulic liftgate and the M935
does. This difference affects:
• Vehicle Length
• Vehicle Weight
• Shipping Dimensions
It also affects its basic purpose. The 5-ton, 6x6 expansible van with hydraulic
liftgate transports heavier, more delicate electronic equipment than the van without a
liftgate. Aside from this, the basic purpose, performance, and special limitations of both
vehicles are the same.
b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M934 and M935 expansible vans transport electronic
base stations into the field. In the traveling position, van truck bodies are 17 feet
long x 8 feet wide (5.2 meters long x 2.4 meters wide). Once in the field the sides are
expanded to give it a width of nearly 14 feet (4.3 meters). They may serve as
communication stations or electronic repair stations. The vans are designed to carry up
to 5,000 pounds (2,270 kilograms) of equipment into the field and up to 15,000 pounds
(6,810 kilograms) on roads. They can also haul additional trailer loads of up to 15,000
pounds (6,810 kilograms) cross country and 30,000 pounds (13,620 kilograms) on
highways. The M935 expansible van is equipped with a hydraulic liftgate (WHLG).
This feature makes it the preferred vehicle to use when heavy, delicate electronic
equipment has to be moved in and/or out of the van.
c. Performance. The maximum speed of M934 and M935 vans is 52 miles per hour
(84 kilometers per hour). Under maximum loads, both vans climb road grades as steep
as 22 degrees. Without trailer loads, they handle grades up to 33 degrees. Fully loaded,
their maximum cruising range is 300 miles (483 kilometers) per tank of fuel. Without
the trailer load, the van cruising range is 350 miles (563 kilometers) per tank. Both
vehicles ford hard-bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a
deep water fording kit and 78 inches (198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Both the M934
and M935 expansible vans have a turning radius of 45 feet 2 inches ( 13.8 meters).
d. Special Limitations.
(1) Vans must be positioned on firm or near-firm soil before expanding sides.
(2) Hydraulic liftgate cannot raise equipment weighing more than 3,000 pounds
(1,362 kilograms).
e. Special Instructions in this Manual.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (e. expansible
van).
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-24, operation of expansible van trucks.
TA 092270
Change 1 1-17
Page 40
TM 9-2320-272-10
1-12. Tabulated Data. |
This paragraph organizes vehicle specifications, special equipment and model
differences in table form for easy reference by operators.
a. Specifications.
1. Vehicle Dimensions. See table 1-1.
2. Weights. See table 1-2.
3. Chassis Dimensions. See table 1-3.
4. Shipping Dimensions. See table 1-4.
5. Capacities for Normal Operating Conditions. See table 1-5.
B 6. General Service Data. See table 1-6.
7. Tire Inflation Data. See table 1-7.
8. Engine and Radiator Data. See table 1-8.
9. Automatic Transmission Data. See table 1-9.
10. Winch and Crane Data. See table 1-10.
//. Differences Between Models. See table 1-1 1.
Table 1-1. Vehicle Dimensions.
Height
Length Overall Height Overall Minimum Reducible
Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
M923 307.4 780.8 116 294.6 91.2 231.6
M924 307.4 780.8 116 294.6 91.2 231.6
M925 329.1 835.9 116 294.6 91.2 231.6
M926 328.9 835.4 116 294.6 91.2 231.6
M927 383.4 973.8 116 294.6 91.2 231.6
M928 404.9 1028.4 116 294.6 91.2 231.6
M929 273 693.4 117.5 298.4 117.5 298.4
M930 294.5 748 117.5 298.4 117.5 298.4
M931 272.6 692.4 111.8 284.1 91.2 231.6
M932 286 726.4 111.8 284.1 91.2 231.6
M934 365.0 927.1 136.5 346.7 136.5 346.7
M935 371.0 942.3 136.5 346.7 136.5 346.7
M936 362.2 920 106 269.2 106 269.2
Vehicle
Width Overall
Under Axle
Ground Clearance
Under Chassis
Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
All 98.0 248.9 11.5 29.2 10.5 26.7
TA 092271
1-18 Change 1
Page 41
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-2. Weights.
Empty Highway
Maximum Payload
Cross-Country
Vehicle Pounds Kilograms Pounds Kilograms Pounds Kilograms
M923 22,357 10,150 20,000 9.080 10,000 4.540
M924 23,337 10,595 20.000 9,080 10.000 4.540
M925 24.080 10,932 20.000 9,080 10,000 4.540
M926 24,060 10,923 20,000 9,080 10.000 4,540
M927 27,749 12,598 20.000 9,080 10.000 4,540
M928 27,811 12,626 20.000 9,080 10.000 4,540
M929 25,888 11,753 20,000 9,080 10.000 4.540
M930 26,624 12,087 20.000 9,080 10.000 4,540
M931 22,089 10,028 25,000* 11,350* 15.000* 6.810*
M932 22,841 10,370 25,000* 11,350* 15.000* 6,810*
M934 29,946 13,595 15.000 6.!$10 5.000 2,270
M935 31,851 14,460 15.000 6,1410 5.000 2,270
M936 39,334 17,858 12.000** 5.448** 7.000** 3,178**
Highway
Maximum Towed Load (Pintle)
Cross Country
Vehicle Pounds Kilograms Pounds Kilograms
M923 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M924 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M925 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M926 30,000 13.620 15,000 6,810
M927 30.000 13.620 15,000 6,810
M928 30,000 13.620 15,000 6,810
M929 30,000 13.620 15,000 6,810
M930 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M93I 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M932 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M934 30.000 13.620 15.000 6,810
M935 30.000 13.620 1 5.000 6,810
M936 30.000
Maximum Towed Load (Fifth Wheel)
20,i )00 9,080
Vehicle Pounds
Highway
Kilograms Pounds
Cross Country
Kilograms
M931 55,000 24.970 37.500 17,025
M932 55.000 24.970 37,500 17,025
*Payload weight on fifth wheel.
**On crane w/boom shipper braced and secured.
TA 090101
1-19
Page 42
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-3. Chassis Dimensions.
Wheel Base Chassis Length
Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
M923 179 454.7 307.5 781
M924 179 454.7 304.7 773.9
M925 179 454.7 326.5 829.3
M926 179 454.7 326.5 829.3
M927 215 546.1 380.9 967.4
M928 215 546.1 402.3 1,021.8
M929 167 424.2 256.9 652.5
M930 167 424.2 278.4 707.1
M93! 167 424.2 265 673.1
M932 167 424.2 278.4 707.1
M934 215 546.1 360 914.4
M935 215 546.1 360 914.4
M936 179 454.7 322.7 819.6
Angle (Degrees) of Turning Radius
Vehicle Approach Departure Feet/Inches Meters
M923 46° 37° 38'0" 11.6
M924 46° 37° 38'0" 11.6
M925 31° 37° 39 '0" 11.9
M926 31° 37° 39'0" 1 1.9
M927 46° 22.5° 45 7" 13.8
M928 31° 22.5° 462" 14.1
M929 46° 60° 35'6" 10.9
M930 31° 60° 36'6" 11.2
M931 46° 68° 35'6" 10.9
M932 31° 63° 36'6" 11.2
M934 46° 24° 45 '2" 13.8
M935 46° 24° 45 '2" 13.8
M936 31° 37° 39 '0" 1 1.9
TA 090102
1-20
Page 43
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-4. Shipping Dimensions.
Shipping Height Shipping Weight
Vehicle Inches Centimeters Pounds Kilograms
M923 91.2 231.6 22.878 10.386
M924 91.2 231.6 22,858 10,377
M925 91.2 231.6 23.603 10.715
M926 91.2 231.6 23,583 10,706
M927 91.2 231.6 26.607 12,079
M928 91.2 231.6 27,331 12,408
M929 1 17.5 298.4 25.136 1 1,41 1
M930 1 17.5 298.4 25,861 1 1,740
M931 91.2 231.6 21,353 9,694
M932 91.2 231.6 22,079 10,023
M934 136.5 346.7 29,437 13,364
M935 136.5 346.7 31,345 14,230
M936 106.0 269.2 38,466 17.463
Shipping Cubage Shipping Tonnage
Vehicle Cubic Ft. Cubic Meters Tons Metric Tons
M923 1,591.0 44.5 1 1.4 10.3
M924 1.591.0 44.5 1 1.4 10.3
M925 1.690.0 47.3 1 1.8 10.7
M926 1,656.0 46.3 1 1.8 10.7
M927 1.971.0 55.1 13.3 12.1
M928 2,082.0 58.2 13.6 12.3
M929 1.819.0 50.9 12.5 11.4
M930 1,962.0 54.9 12.9 11.7
M931 1,371.0 38.3 10.7 9.7
M932 1,480.0 41.4 11.0 10.0
M934 2,780.0 77.8 14.7 13.3
M935 2,906.0 81.4 15.7 14.2
M936 2.135.0 59.7 19.2 17.4
TA 090103
1-21
Page 44
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-5. Capacities for Normal Operating Conditions
Vehicle Description
Capacity
Standard Metric
In Normal
Operating Conditions
+32°F to +90°F
(0°C to 32.2°C)
All Cooling System 47 quarts 44.46 liters 1 12 Ethylene Gly
col, 1/2 Water
All Engine (crankcase
only)
23 quarts 21.75 liters OE/HDO 30
All Engine (crankcase
with new filter)
27 quarts 25.54 liters OE/HDO 30
M923.M924,
M925,M926,
M927,M928,
M934,M935
Fuel Tank
(single tank)
81 gallons 306.6 liters Diesel Fuel (grades
DF1,DF2, or
DFA)
M936 Fuel Tanks
(dual tanks)
139 gallons 526.17 liters Diesel Fuel (grades
DF1.DF2. or
DFA)
M929,M930,
M931.M932
Fuel Tanks
(dual tanks)
1 16 gallons 439.1 liters Diesel Fuel
(grades DFI,DF2,
or DFA)
M925.M926
M928,M932
Hydraulic
System
8.75 gallons 33.1 liters OE/HDO 10
M929 Hydraulic
System
5 gallons 18.9 liters OE/HDO 10
M930 Hydraulic
System
6.25 gallons 23.6 liters OE/HDO 10
M935 Hydraulic
System
3.5 gallons 13.2 liters OE HDO 10
M936 Hydraulic
System
100 gallons 378.4 liters OE/HDO 10
All Differentials
(each)
12 quarts 1 1.3 liters GO 80/90
All Steering System 5 quarts 4.7 liters OE/HDO 10
All Transmission
(W/PTO)
17 quarts
19 quarts
16.0 liters
17.9 liters
OE/HDO 10
OE/HDO
All Transfer Case 6.5 quarts 6.1 liters GO 80/90
All W/ Front
Winch
Winch Gear
Case (front
winch)
2.6 pints 1.23 liters GO 80/90
M936 Winch Gear
Case (rear winch)
3 pints 1.41 liters GO 80/90
All Windshield
Washer
4 quarts 3.78 liters 1 /3 Cleaning
Compound,
2/3 Water
TA 090104
1-22
Page 45
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-6. General Service Data •
Vehicle Description +90°F(+32°C) +40°F to -10°F
(+4° to -23°C)
0°Fto-65°F
(-17°C to-54°C)
Arctic
Conditions
All Cooling System 1/2 Ethylene
Glycol
1/2 Water
1 1 2 Ethylene
Glycol
1/2 Water
2/3 Ethylene
Glvcol
1/3 Water
All Engine (crankcase
only)
OE/HDO 30 OE/HDO 10 OEA
All Fuel Tank(s) DF1,DF2 or
DFA
DFl or DFA DFA
-M9-207
All Hydraulic
Systems
OE/HDO 30 OE/HDO 10 OEA
RefertoI
All
All
Differentials
(each)
GO 80/90
OE/HDO 10
GO 80/90
OE/HDO 10
GO 75
OEASteering System
All Transmission OE/HDO 10 OE/HDO 10 OEA
All Transfer Case GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 75
All W/
Winch
Winch Gear
Case
GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 75
All Windshield
Washer
1/3 Cleaning
Compound
2/3 Water
1/2 Cleaning
Compound
1/2 Water
2/3 Cleaning
Compound
I/3 Water
Table 1-7. Tire Inflation Data.
PRESSURE RATING
FRONT REAR
VEHICLE
(TIRE SIZE)
Standard Metric
(psi) (kPa)
H CC H CC
Standard Metric
(psi) (kPa)
H CC H CC
M923,M924,M925,M926,
M927,M928,M929,M930,
M931,M932,M934,M935
80 60 551 413 50 30 344 206
M936 (ll:00x 20) 70 60 482 413
25 25 172 172
70 60 48 2 413
25 25 172 172
All Models: Mud, Sand
and Snow
H: Highway
CC: Cross Country
TA 092272
Change 1 1-23
Page 46
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-8. Engine and Radiator Data
ENGINE (NHC 250)
Type Diesel, naturally-aspirated, liquid cooled
Cylinders 6 (in-line)
Brake Horsepower 240 horsepower at 2100 rpm
Idle Speed (engine rpm) 625 ± 25 rpm
Operating Speed (engine rpm) 1500-2100 rpm
Oil Pressure at Idle 15 psi (103.4 kPa)
Oil Pressure at Full Power 55-75 psi (379.2-517.1 kPa)
Coolant (normal operating temperature) 165°F to I95°F (73° C to 90°C)
Fuel Consumption (approximate) 3-4 mpg (1.28-1.70 kilometers per liter)
COOLING SYSTEM
Surge Tank Cap Pressure 14 pounds per square inch (96.5 kilopascals)
Thermostat:
Starts to Open 175°F (79°C)
Fully Open 185°F (85°C)
Radiator Crossflow Type
Fan 26 inches (660 millimeters), 6-blade
Table 1-9. Automatic Transmission Data
TRANSMISSION (MT654)
Oil Type OE/HDO 10
Oil Capacity 4.25 Gallons (16.08 liters)
Oil Temperature:
Maximum 325°F(I63°C)
Normal Operating Temperature 160°F to 220°F(71°C to 104 °C)
Power Takeoff Converter Driven
TRANSMISSION DRIVING RANGE SELECTION
CAUTION
Do not back up vehicle with transfer in low range.
Range
Selection Conditions
Maximum Speeds
W/Transfer Case
in HIGH in LOW
"R" (Reverse)
"N" (Neutral)
"1-5" (Drive)
"1-4" (Fourth)
"1-3" (Third)
"1-2" (Second)!
"1" (First)
Easy grades clear of traffic with ground guide
Good roads, grades, traffic conditions
Moderate grades, traffic, restricted speed limits
Moderate grades,heavy traffic, restricted speed limits
Steep grades, heavy traffic, rough terrain
Starting heavy loads, extreme grades, rough terrain
5 mph
(8 kph)
52 mph
(84 kph)
43 mph
(69 kph)
33 mph
(53 kph)
25 mph
(40 kph)
12 mph
(19 kph)
22 mph
(35 kph)
17 mph
(27 kph)
13 mph
(21 kph)
10 mph
(16 kph)
5 mph
(8 kph)
TA 092273
1-24 Change 1
Page 47
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 1-10. Winch and Crane Data
Vehicle Description
Capacities
Standard Metric Ref Para
M925,M926 Front Winch:
M928,M930 Max. Load 20,000 lbs. 9,080 Kilograms 2-19
M932 Cable Length 200 ft. 61 Meters
M936 Front Winch: 20,000 lbs. 9,080 Kilograms 2-19
Max Load 280 ft. 85.4 Meters
Cable Length
M936 Rear Winch:
Max. Load 45,000 lbs. 20,430 Kilograms 2-2 lc
Cable Length 350 ft. 106.75 Meters
M936 Boom:
Max. Load (w/boom jacks) 20,000 lbs. 9,080 Kilograms 2-2 Id
Rotation with Stop: 270°
Retracted Length: 10 Ft. 3.05 Meters
Extended Length: 18 Ft. 5.5 Meters
Cable Length: 95 ft. 5 in. 29.11 Meters
b. Differences Between Models. The major equipment and functional differences
between models are given in table 1-11. For illustrations and descriptions, refer to the
following:
• Illustration of each model (refer to paras 1-5 through 1-1 1).
• Description of equipment (see description/reference column in table 1-11).
TA 092274
Change 1 1-25
Page 48
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table I -II. Differences Between Models.
Equipment/
FunctionM9M M9M
M929 M926
M9M
M928 M929 M990 M991 M932 M9992
M9M
M996
Descrip
tion
(Para/
Page)
Personnel /Cargo
Operations
X X X X X X X X 2-20/2-90
2-27/2-I4I
Wrecker Operations X 2-21/2-94
Dump Operations X X 2-22/2-lK)
Fifth Wheel Operations X X 2-23/2-N5
Communications/
Electronic Repair
Operations X X 2-24/2- 1 22
Front Winch X X X X X X X 2-I9/2-X4
Rear Winch X 2-21/ 2-94
Wheel Bases:
179 in. (454.6 cm)
377.8 in. (959.6 cm)
167 in. (424.2 cm)
215 in. (546.1 cm)
X X X X
X X
X X X X
X X
X 1-12/1-20
1-12/ 1-20
1-12/ 1-20
1-12/1-20
Floodlights X 2-4/2-14
Body:
Cargo Dropside
Cargo (permanent
sides)
X
X
X
X X X
2-20/2-90
2-20/2-90
Dump X X 2-22/2-110
Tractor X X 2-23/2-115
Van X X 2-24/2-122
Crane X 2-21/2-94
Heat/ Air Conditioned
Body X X 2-24/2-122
Brake Lock X 2-21/2-95
Fuel Tanks:
Single Tanks
Dual (116 gal.) (439 1)
Dual )139 gal.) (526 1)
X X X X X X
X X X X
X X
X
1-12/1-22
1-12/ 1-22
1-12/ 1 -22
Hydraulic Liftgate X 2-24/2-122
TA 092275
1-26 Change 1
Page 49
CHAPTER 2
TM 9-2320-272-10
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
2-1 . Know Your Controls and Indicators. | Before you attempt to operate your
equipment, be sure you are familiar with the loeation and function of all controls and
indicators. The location and function of your controls and indicators are described in
this section as follows:
a. Chassis Controls and Indicators: paragraph 2-3.
b. Body Equipment. Controls, and Indicators: paragraph 2-4.
c. Special Kits, Controls, and Indicators: paragraph 2-5.
NOTE
• Except where specifically noted, the controls and indicators
in this section are generally applicable to all vehicles
covered in this manual.
• In this manual, the term "left" indicates the driver side of
the vehicle. The term "right" indicates the opposite, or crew
side of the vehicle.
2-2. Preparation for Use.) When a vehicle is first received by the using organization,
it is the responsibility of the officer-in-charge to determine whether it has been properly
prepared for service by the supplier. It is also the responsibility of the officer-in-charge
to be sure the vehicle is in condition to perform its functions. Organizational
maintenance will provide any additional service required to bring the vehicle to
operating standards. Whenever practical, the operator will assist with this service.
TA 090109
2-1
Page 50
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-3. Chassis Controls and Indicators.
Key Item Key Item
1 Air filter indicator
2 Parking brake warning light
3 Low air pressure warning light
4 Spring brake warning light
5 Engine coolant temperature warning light
6 Front wheel drive engagement light
7 High beam indicator
8 Throttle control
9 Battery switch
Key Item and Function
1 Air filter indicator shows red when engine air filter needs servicing.
2 Parking brake warning light illuminates when parking brakes are engaged.
3 Low air pressure w arning light illuminates when airbrake system pressure drops below
60 psi (413 kPa).
4 Spring brake warning light illuminates when spring parking brakes are engaged.
5 Engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates when engine coolant
temperature exceeds 200° F (93° C). Normal engine coolant operating temperature is
1 65° F to 1 95° F ( 74° C to 90° C).
6 Front wheel drive engagement light illuminates when front wheel drive lock-in switch
is engaged.
7 High beam indicator illuminates when front headlights are on high beam.
TA 0901 10
10 Ignition switch
1 1 Tachometer
12 Speedometer
13 Engine coolant temperature gage
14 Primary air pressure gage
15 Del roster control lever
16 Heat vent control lever
17 Fresh air vent control lever
IS Spring brake release control
«
2-2
Page 51
TM 9-2320-272-10
8 Throttle control sets engine speed at desired rpm without maintaining pressure on
foot pedal. Throttle control locks in desired position when pulled out. Rotating
control handle clockwise or counterclockwise unlocks it.
9 Battery switch activates all electrical circuits on or off except arctic heaters. |
10 Ignition switch has OFF, RUN, and START positions. Switch automatically
returns from START to RUN when hand pressure is released.
1 1 Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute and operating hours
in tenths.
12 SpeedometerIodometer indicates vehicle speed and total mileage. |
13 Engine coolant temperature gage indicates engine coolant temperature. Normal
operating temperature is 165°F to 195°F (74°C to 90°C).
14 Primary air pressure gage indicates air pressure in the primary brake system.
Normal pressure is 120 psi (827 kPa).
15 Defroster control lever opens vents to direct heated air at the windshield.
16 Heat vent control lever controls the amount of heat blown into the cab by
adjusting the opening of heat ventilation doors.
17 Fresh air vent control lever pulls out to open ventilation doors, allowing outside
air to circulate in the cab.
18 Spring brake release control is pushed in to release spring parking brakes
independently of the mechanical parking brake. Control is used to release spring
parking brakes in order to test and adjust mechanical brake.
TA 092276
Change 1 2-3
Page 52
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item Key Item
1 Battery gage 1 1
2 Secondary air pressure gage 12
3 Transmission oil temperature gage
4 Engine oil pressure gage 13
5 Fuel gage 14
6 Wrecker warning light switch (M936 only) 15
7 Trailer air supply valve 16
8 Emergency stop 17
9 Brake lock (M936 only) 18
10 Heater blower motor switch
Key Item and Function
Wiper motor switches
Fuel tank selector switch
(dual tank vehicles only)
Front wheel drive lock-in switch
Ether start switch
Light switch
Windshield washer control
Turning signal control lever
Horn button
1 Battery gage indicates charging condition of the battery.
2 Secondary air pressure gage indicates air pressure in the secondary brake system.
Normal pressure is 120 psi (827 kPa).
3 Transmission oil temperature gage indicates temperature of transmission oil.
Normal operating temperature is 160°F to 220° F (77° C to 104°C).
4 Engine oil pressure gage indicates oil pressure when engine is running. Normal
operating pressure at idle is 15 psi (103 kPa). Normal operating pressure with
vehicle in motion is 55 to 75 psi (379 to 517 kPa).
5 Fuel gage indicates fuel level in fuel tank (s).
6 Wrecker warning light switch (M936 only) controls operation of amber warning
light used during crane operations or while towing disabled vehicle.
7 Trailer air supply valve pushes in to supply air to the brake system of towed
trailer or semitrailer.
8 Emergency stop is pulled out to cut off fuel to engine. Stop is used only in an
emergency.
9 Brake lock (M936 only) is used during crane operations to lock all vehicle service
brakes.
10 Heater blower motor switch activates heater motor and blower.
TA 092277
2-4 Change 1
Page 53
TM 9-2320-272-10
1 1 Wiper motor switches actuate wipers and control windshield wiper speed.
12 Fuel tank selector sw itch (dual tank vehicles only) permits reading fuel level on
the fuel gage for each fuel tank when turned L(left) or R(right).
13 Front w heel drive lock-in sw itch allows operator to engage front wheel drive and
is used only when vehicle is in HIGH transfer range. In LOW transfer range, the
vehicle's front wheel drive engages automatically. Vehicle may be in motion or
stopped to engage front wheel drive lock-in switch.
14 Fther start switch injects ether into engine for cold weather starting.
15 Light sw itch controls operation of vehicle lights.
16 Windshield w asher control s pushed in to spray cleaning solution on front windshield.
17 Turning signal control lever is moved down to operate vehicle left turn signals, up
to operate right turn signals.
18 Horn button is pressed to operate vehicle horn.
19 Instrument panel lights illuminate instrument panel gages.
20 Grab handle aids crewmembers in entering and exiting vehicle cab. Handle is also
a brace lor crewmembers during travel.
26 Wing nut is tightened to hold window
in open position.
TA 090113
2-5
Page 54
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Automatic transmission shift lever is used to select vehicle driving gear.
2 Transmission pow er takeoff control lever engages transmission to provide power
for auxiliary equipment.
3 Front winch control lever (winch-equipped vehicles only) is pulled to wind front
winch.
4 Cowl ventilator (one on each side of cab) is opened by vent control lever located
on the instrument panel to provide ventilation.
5 Transfer shift lever is pushed down to HIGH for light load operations, up to
LOW for heavy load operations. Six-wheel drive is achieved automatically when
transfer shift lever is placed in LOW.
6 Mechanical hand brake contol lever is pulled up to engage parking brakes and
down to disengage brakes. Knob on top of handle is turned clockwise to increase
braking action, counterclockwise to decrease braking action. When hand brake
lever is engaged, it also trips valve to release air pressure from emergency spring
brakes. This engages emergency spring brakes.
7a Transfer power takeoff control lever is engaged to provide power to crane and
rear winch (M936).
7b Dump body control lever (M929, M930) is moved forward to raise dump body
and back to lower dump body.
8 Accelerator pedal controls engine speed.
9 Brake pedal is depressed to brake vehicle.
10 Dimmer switch is depressed to raise or lower headlight beam.
TA 092278
2-6 Change 1
Page 55
TM 9-2320-272-10
1 1 Warning buzzer is located above the
left cowl vent. The unit buzzes when
transmission oil temperature exceeds
325°F (162.7°C) and/or when
airbrake system pressure drops below
60psi. (413.7 kPa).
12 Backrest control adjusts seat backrest.
13 Seat cushion control adjusts height
and angle of seat cushion.
14 Seat horizontal control positions seat
forward or backward.
15 Fuel tank selector switch on models
with dual tanks is turned manually
L (left) or R (right) to select fuel
supply source. Selector is located on
the cab floor on the left side of the
operator's seat.
16 Spring tension control increases seat
spring tension when crank is turned
clockwise.
17 Slotted brackets at each corner permit
front portion of seat to be raised or
lowered.
1 8 Transmission dipstick and oil fill
turns counterclockwise to remove and
check transmission oil level.
Trap door opens to provide access to
dipstick and oil fill.
TA 090115
2-7
Page 56
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Personnel heater vent cock turns counterclockwise to purge personnel hot water
heater of air.
2 Safety handle holds crew seat in up position for inspection of batteries.
3 Two person crew seat lifts up to provide access to batteries.
4 Clip holds safety handle (2) when crew seat (3) is down.
5 Batteries provide electrical charge to the starter motor and electric current to
headlights, horns, and gages.
6 Latches lock crew seat down for travel.
7 Map compartment stores maps,
manuals, forms, and papers.
8 Front winch drum lock knob locks
drum when winch is not in use.
9 Front winch control is pulled out to
engage winch clutch, pushed in to
disengage winch clutch.
TA 092279
2-8 Change 1
Page 57
TM 9-2320-272-10
1 0 Hood latch (one on each side of vehicle)
unhooks to release hood.
1 1 Hood handle is used to assist in the
raising and lowering of the hood.
1 2 Hood safe.'y bar is used to pull tilt
hood forward and down. Bar secures
raised hood to bumper while in up
position. Bar is secured by pin (14) to
storage bracket (13) during travel.
1 3 Safety bar storage bracket secures
safety bar to hood.
14 Safety bar pin is attached to safety
bar. Pin secures bar to hood bracket
during travel and secures bar to
bumper bracket during use.
1 5 Bumper bracket secures safety bar to
bumper when hood is in open
position.
16 Oil dipstick is unscrewed and removed
to check oil level.
17 Shutoff cocks are turned
counterclockwise to circulate heated
coolant through vehicle cab heating
system. Both cocks must be opened
before the heater blower motor can
provide heated air. Cocks must be
closed when operating in warm
weather.
18 Radiator drain cock is turned
counterclockwise to drain coolant from
the radiator.
TA 092280
Change 1 2-9
Page 58
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Power steering oil reservoir dipstick is
attached to reservoir fill cap. Dipstick
is unscrewed and removed to check
power steering oil level.
2 Engine oil filler cap is removed to add
oil.
3 Coolant surge tank cap is removed to
add coolant.
4 Window washer container cap unsnaps to refill washer reservoir.
5 Ether storage cylinder stores ether used for starting during cold weather operations.
6 Fuel tank filler cap is turned
counterclockwise to remove for fuel
servicing.
7 Primary drain cock turns counter
clockwise to drain water from primary
brake system air reservoir.
8 Secondary drain cock turns
counterclockwise to drain water from
secondary brake system air reservoir.
9 Wet tank drain cock turns
counterclockwise to drain water from
brake system wet tank air reservoir.
10 Spring brake drain cock turns
counterclockwise to drain water from
spring brake air reservoir.
U Tool box latch handle turns down to
unlatch and open tool box.
TA 092281
2-10 Change 1
Page 59
TM 9-2320-272-10
12 Slave receptacle located on right rear
side of cab, is the plug-in point for an
external power source to jump start
the vehicle when batteries have
become discharged.
13 Spare tire boom extends to allow spare tire to be lifted and guided over the side
of the truck. Boom is installed on models M923 through M928. M931, and M932
only. Dump trucks (M929. M930) and vans (M934, M935) employ stationary
chain falls. Wrecker (M936) uses the vehicle crane to lift and lower spare tire.
14 Lock pin secures wing lug to hinged wheel brace for traveling.
15 Hinged wheel brace is removed before wheel removal.
16 Chain fall lifts and lowers spare tire. Chain fall travels along the spare tire boom
on rollers. A stop built into the boom prevents overextending the chain fall rollers
beyond the boom end.
17 Wheel brace holds tire in place once
hinged brace is secured.
18 Spare tire wing lug secures spare tire
to wrecker.
TA 090119
2-11
Page 60
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Trailer power outlet receptacle provides electric power for trailer when connected
by stored cable to trailer connection.
2 Towing pintle hook opens to attach trailer towing bar.
3 Emergency air coupling is connected by an air coupling hose to the front
emergency coupling of a trailer or vehicle to be towed. This connection permits
the towing vehicle to charge the brake system of a trailer or disabled vehicle with
air.
4 Trailer air valve handles are turned to release compressed air to trailer brake system.
5 Trailer .service air coupling is connected by an air coupling hose to the front
service coupling of a trailer or vehicle to be towed. This connection permits the
operator to engage the brakes of the towed load when engaging the brake pedal
of the towing vehicle.
TA 090120
2-12
Page 61
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-4. Body Equipment, Controls, and Indicators.
a. Medium Wrecker.
6 Directional control lever controls rotation of rear winch drum. Control is pulled back
to WIND and forward to UNWIND. Center position is neutral.
7 Torque control lever is pulled forward to HIGH for light winch loads and back to
LOW for heavy loads. Lever must be engaged HIGH or LOW before operation of
directional control lever (6).
8 Cable tensioner control valve controls tension on winch cable. Lever is pulled up
to release tension, down to apply tension.
9 Throttle control lever controls winch speed.
10 Boom control lever raises boom when pulled toward operator, lowers boom when
moved away from operator.
1 1 Hoist control lever raises boom hook when pulled toward operator, lowers hook
when moved away from operator.
12 Crowd control lever retracts boom when pulled toward operator, extends boom
when moved away from operator.
13 Swing control lever swings crane assembly right when pulled toward operator,
swings crane assembly left when moved away from operator.
TA 092282
Change 1 2-13
Page 62
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
Shipper brace retaining bracket holds
free end of shipper braces when not
in use.
Floodlights each have ON /OFF
switch. Floodlight control switch on
instrument panel must be on before
floodlights operate.
Shipper brace assemblies support
shipper and boom during heavy rear
lifts and cross-country operations.
Frame tube provides storage space for
outriggers when not in use. Outriggers
are pin-locked in storage position.
Outriggers provide stabilization when handling heavy side lifts with crane.
Handles raise and lower outriggers.
7 Boom jacks are extended as required for heavy rear or side lifts.
Boom jack base plates are attached to
boom jacks when in use. and stored in
vehicle when not in use.
Tie bar adds stability to boom jack.
The tie bar is secured by boom jack
pins.
TA 090122
2-14
Page 63
TM 9-2320-272-10
10 Field chocks anchor vehicle in winch operations.
1 1 Storage space for boom jacks when not in use.
12 Storage space for field chocks when not in use.
1 3 Storage space for tow bar.
14 Dipstick on top of reservoir measures oil level in hydraulic oil reservoir.
TA 090123
2-15
Page 64
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Filter indicator on front of reservoir tells whether crane oil filter is CLEAN or
NEEDS CLEANING. Filter element must be changed whenever indicator is on
NEEDS CLEANING.
TA 090124
2-16
Page 65
TM 9-2320-272-10
b. Dump Trucks.
2 Transmission power takeoff control
lever provides power to operate dump
hydraulic hoist and front winch on
M930.
3 Dump body control raises dump body
when in power up (3a) position;
lowers dump body when in power
down (3b) position, l.evcr should be
locked in neutral (3) position when
hoist is not being operated.
4 Lock is spring loaded and locks dump
body control in neutral when hoist is
not in use.
5 Tailgate control lever on dump body unlocks tailgate latches (8) when pulled back;
locks tailgate when pushed forward.
6 Retaining pins secure tailgate upper
hinge pins during standard dump
operations. Pins are removed lor
rocker type-dump operations.
7 Wing harness hooks secure tailgate
wings to side of dump. Pins are
removed to free wings for rocker-type
dump operations.
8 Tailgate latches unlock when tailgate
control lever (5) is pulled back.
Latches lock the tailgate when hand
lever is pushed forward.
TA 092283
Change 1 2-17
Page 66
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Upper hinge brackets house upper hinger pins by means of retaining pin.
2 Tailgate wings swing to rear for rocker-type dump operations.
3 Tailgate wing brackets house upper hinge pins for rocker-type dump operations.
4 Dump body support braces hold dump body in up position for added safety during
maintenance or cleaning of dump body underside.
5 Brackets hold dump body support braces when braces are not being used.
2-18
Page 67
TM 9-2320-272-10
'. Cargo Trucks.
8 Reservoir cap is wrench tight and provides access to oil dipstick.
TA 090127
2-19
Page 68
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Tractor Trucks.
Key Item and Function
1 Electrical cable and connector is
connected to the semitrailer electrical
receptacle to provide electric power to
semitrailer.
2 Emergency airbrake hose line and
coupling is connected to the
emergency airbrake coupling on the
semitrailer. Semitrailer emergency
brake system is activated when the
"regular" air system fails.
Service airbrake hose line and
coupling connects to the service air
receptacle on the semitrailer.
Airbrake hose coupling shutoff cocks
should be in the down (open) position
at all times during normal operation
of tractor truck.
5 Loc king plunger lever is pulled up and out to unlock fifth wheel coupling jaws.
6 Coupling jaws lock the semitrailer kingpin into the tractor fifth wheel.
TA 090128
2-20
Page 69
TM 9-2320-272-10
7 Expanded van side is secured to hinged roof (8) by swivel hooks (14) and toggle
clamps (15).
8 Hinged roof panel is supported by swivel hooks (14) and toggle clamps (15).
9 Endpanel is hinged to van side (7) and secured to corner post (II) by sliding bolt ( 18).
10 Balance mechanism evenly controls lowering and raisinu of hinged floor ( 19) and roof
(8).
I I Corner post provides brace for expanded sides.
12 Heaters are in front of van. Left heater in both van models is fuel powered. Right
heater in M934 van is fuel powered. Right heater in M935 is electrically powered.
13 Bonnet door control handle is pushed forward to open bonnet door before
operating air conditioning. Handle is pulled back to close bonnet door alter air
conditioning unit has been shut off.
14 Swivel hooks are swung sideways to support hinged roof panel when van isexpanded.
15 Toggle clamp locks with swivel hook (14) to secure hinged roof panel to van side.
16 Heat registers are in use when van heaters (12) are operating. Registers must be
closed when van heaters (12) are not in use.
17 Latch on van corner post holds sliding bolt in correct position.
18 Sliding holt alines end panel (9) with van corner post (1I).
19 Floor is hinged for up and down movement.
TA 090129
2-21
Page 70
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Power input receptacle is connected by cable to outside power source to provide
electric power for air conditioner.
2 Circuit breaker must be in ON position before use of air conditioner controls.
3 Compressor circuit breaker shuts air conditioner off automatically if electrical or
other trouble develops in conditioner. Circuit breaker must be manually reset to
ON position after trouble has been corrected.
4 Air conditioner controls air circulation. COOL position circulates cool air. VENT
position circulates outside air into the van body.
5 Fan speed control increases air circulation speed in HIGH position and decreases
air circulation speed in LOW position.
6 Temperature selector lever provides cooler temperatures when in COOLER
position. In WARMER position, air conditioner maintains 68°F to 72°F
(20°C to 22°C) temperatures. Air conditioner shuts off when temperature selector
knob is in OFF position.
7 Heater sw itch circulates heated air in HEATER position and unheated outside air
in FAN position. Heater stops in OFF position.
8 White indicator light glows when heater is working properly.
9 Red indicator light glows when heater stops because of fuel or ignition trouble.
10 Reset button is pushed to restart heater when fuel or ignition trouble has been
corrected.
1 1 Handle controls mix of outside and inside air when heater is operating.
TA 090130
2-22
Page 71
TM 9-2320-272-10
12 Circuit breaker box controls electric power received from outside source.
NOTE
An instruction plate near the breaker box lists circuits controlled by
each switch.
13 Air conditioner vents are opened to allow cool air to circulate.
14 Heater thermostat regulates heaters.
15 Hydraulic lift gate auxiliary sw itch (M935 only) raises and lowers hydraulic lift gate
when external power is in use.
16 Power converter sw itch changes alternating electric current from outside source to
direct current used in van electrical equipment.
17 Blackout light switch is turned on for blackout operations.
18 Emergency light sw itch is turned on when normal service lights fail.
19 Fire extinguishers are mounted on van front and rear walls.
20 Telephone jack connects van telephone to outside lines.
21 Van body expanding and retracting wrench is used to expand and retract van body.
22 Side panel lock wrench is used to lock outer edges of van roof, corner posts and end
panels when van is expanded.
23 Plate contains instructions for operation of van.
24 Side doors are used by personnel when van is expanded.
TA 090131
2-23
Page 72
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Window regulator opens window
when turned clockwise, closes window
when turned counterclockwise.
2 Eye-holt unscrews counterclockwise to
free stabilizer (3) from travel position.
3 Stabilizer located directly beneath
each van corner post telescopes down
to ground level to stabilize van before
expanding.
4 Eye pin inserts into holes in stabilizer (3)
to hold telescoped parts in place.
5 Bonnet door must be opened before air
conditioner is operated.
6 Rod opens bonnet door when bonnet
door control handle inside van is
8 Side lockrods are attached to lock handles (18) when van is expanded.
9 Hydraulic lift gate on M935 model has a capacity of 3.000 lbs (1362 kg.).
TA 090132
2-24
Page 73
331060VI
|3AKJJJO|)#)SdOJ>(0O|
nuitfngueenq/vve|dunq>po|sarneasuij9|
emaJfotdeisddeunpxe
reneesotddeunpxesiubaueqw)8)
sdor>po|deis3I?bi?u3saipuDifyw/XI
|3AaJJ
JOJ|33JleqK3JOMOpSJ3AOJ)SDM4I7J/_[
3SnUI3JnSJdedi?|U3l|AvSJOddiq
e3w?uesidy.w.iqiiuuunoiurjppo']9|
SJOOdUaAOSOpOJUAU)ddut?
unpootpnedurntsid|piwijy.)«/./ooc/si
rofdoptuprrododunpxosiul!auoq.wsiuouopiuo.i.is.n|t>po|ot
..)Sjw>|.io|.ipeurntsiq.iu.tr/Wuoipimi.ujouoisunpxe.uofeqroojfperiuiqdunfoor
potfuiqsodis.i|qisui?pxo>po|un01osi.vv>popjoiuno.ipndoiumsii|.iujrmy.w/pI
•tcnntfqseso|edunsenpo./<?.w>//ortuo.)XinsopIHuiuado£\
eib3tfi|sesinjdunser,wo|./,>.i,>/|oriuo.iXuiit).v<Jjdl8uuaM(r]£|
|OabrtSuund
rsdedn|fodueiuottoqe.in.Tostcnnt|i|foedirsdeunotdeqnnttnswmppunsi|oqM'g||
pdoujSt9IAluotcn3t.|i|uodreotsernsrappir]0|
sz-z
Page 74
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Phone jack receptacle receives outside communication lines.
2 Door handle \& turned counterclockwise to open and clockwise to close rear van door.
3 Ladder clamps in M934 van secure lower end of ladders for travel.
4 Pow er entrance receptacle receives power cable (5) to provide electric power to van
from outside source.
5 Power cable connects van to outside power source.
6 Power cable reel stores power cable (5) for travel.
7 Stabilizers steady van when expanded.
8 Ground spike provides ground when external electric power is used.
9 Storage box for ground spike, tools, and cable reel canvas cover.
TA 090134
2-26
Page 75
TM 9-2320-272-10
10 Locking plungers (located beneath left and right rear doors) are pushed downward
to release ratchets (12) and pawls (13) before expanding or retracting sides.
Plungers are pulled upward to lock van sides in expanded or retracted position.
1 1 Van body expanding and retracting wrench (stowed in bracket on inner part of
rear door) fits over ratchets ( 12). Wrench is turned counterclockwise to expand
left van side, clockwise to expand right van side.
12 Ratchet is turned by expanding and retracting wrench (1 I) to expand and retract
van sides.
13 Pawl attached to locking plunger (10) locks ratchet (12). Pawl releases ratchet
when locking plunger (10) is pushed downward.
TA 090135
2-27
Page 76
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-5. Special Kits, Controls, and Indicators.
a. A-Frame Kit can he installed on all vehicles with a front winch lot loading and
unloading cargo trucks. A-frame load limit is 3.000 pounds (1.362 kilograms).
Key Item and Function
1 Apex spreader positions A-frame and supports sheave assemhly.
2 Tube and leg assemblies arc attached to lifting shackle brackets and apex spreader
to form an A-frame for lifting.
3 Sheave assembly supports front winch cable in lifting position.
4 Cable assembly is attached to A-frame and inverted pintle hook to maintain A-frame
in position at a 60° angle.
5 Plate assembly protects cable assembly and truck bed from wear and distortion.
b. Airbrake Control Kit is installed on vehicles towing trailers equipped with airbrakes.
NOTE
Air brake kit is for use on all
models except tractors and
wreckers (M931. M932. and
M936).
6 Airbrake hand control lever applies
brakes on towed vehicle when pulled
down. Lever releases brakes when
pulled up.
TA 090136
2-28
Page 77
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Arctic Winterization Kit is installed on vehicles operating in temperatures of
-25°F(-32°C) or lower.
9 Hardtop closure replaces canvas cover for arctic temperature operations.
NOTE
Hardtop closure is also available as a separate kit.
10 Quilted engine compartment cover is attached to the brush guard, hood, and side
panels to maintain normal operating temperatures under arctic temperature
conditions.
1 1 Aperture flap is opened or closed to control the amount of air passing through
the radiator.
Change 1 2-29
Page 78
TM 9-2320-272-10
Key Item and Function
1 Defroster control handle is pulled all the way out for maximum defroster
operation, pushed in for maximum heater operation, and placed halfway out for
combination heater/defroster operation.
2 Heat vent handle is pulled all the way out for maximum airflow, pushed in to decrease
or shut off the air.
3 Hi-lo switch controls the personnel heater blower speed.
4 Red indicator light is on when personnel heater is operating.
5 Start-off-run switch is positioned down to start the personnel heater, up to run
the heater, once it has been started, and in the center to stop the heater.
6 Hi-lo switch controls the rate of fuel burning and blower speed in the engine heater.
7 Red indicator light is on when the engine heater is operating.
8 Start-off-run switch is positioned down to start the engine heater, up to run the
heater and in the center to stop the heater.
TA 090138
2-30
Page 79
TM 9-2320-272-10
9 Fuel burning personnel heater is located under hood on right side of engine. I
10 Inlet coolant shutoff cock is opened to allow coolant from surge tank to pass
down to engine coolant heater.
1 1 Outlet coolant shutoff cock is opened to allow heated engine coolant to enter
engine.
12 Coolant shutoff cock near engine coolant heater in vehicle tool box is opened to
allow coolant to enter fuel burning engine coolant heater.
13 Petcock is opened to allow fuel to enter engine coolant heater.
14 Fuel burning engine coolant heater is installed in the left corner of vehicle tool box.
15 Electric fuel pump installed near air cleaner assembly on left side of vehicle cab is
battery powered to provide fuel for engine coolant heater and personnel heater.
16 Fuel petcock must be open to allow fuel to be pumped to engine coolant heater
and fuel burning personnel heater.
TA 092285
Change 1 2-31
Page 80
TM 9-2320-272-10
e. Deep Water Fording Kit permits vehicles to cross through water up to 78 in.
(198.1cm).
Key Item and Function
1 Fording control handle is pulled out on entering water and pushed in on leaving water.
2 Plate contains fording control handle instructions.
3 Storage boss stores flywheel housing
drain plug during normal operations.
4 Flywheel housing drain plug is
removed from storage hoss and
installed in flywheel drain port (5) to
prevent water from entering flywheel
housing.
5 Flyw heel housing drain port is
plugged during fording operation;
open during normal operation.
i
TA 090140
2-32
Page 81
TM 9-2320-272-10
/ Troopseat and Paulin Kit is installed for troop operations.
6 End curtains protect front and rear ends of cargo compartment.
7 Lashing rope secures end curtain to crossbow.
8 Endflap opens and closes for ventilation.
9 Troopseats on each side can be secured up for cargo, or down for seating, as required.
10 Paulin protects top and sides of cargo body.
1 1 Crossbows support top of paulin.
12 Straps secure paulin top to crossbows when sides are rolled up.
13 Stave and corner assemblies support crossbows.
14 Lashing hooks secure side of paulin to truck bed.
15 Safety strap at tailgate protects passengers against falling from vehicle.
TA 092286
Change 1 2-33
Page 82
TM 9-2320-272-10
g. Machine Gun Mount Kit can be installed on all cargo, tractor, and wrecker trucks. Kit
is designed for use with M2 or M60 machine guns.
Key Item and Function
1 Gun swings full circle around horizontal
track of moun*.
2 Bracket permits up/ down swivel
h. Rifle Mount Kit secures M16 rifles to inside of cab for travel.
3 Catch assembly holds weapon safely
in place for travel. Assembly is pulled
out and up to free rifle when needed.
TA 090142
2-34
Page 83
TM 9-2320-272-10
Section II. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS
AND SERVICES
2-6. General. | A permanent reeord of the services, repairs, and modifications made
to these vehicles must be recorded. Sec TM 38-750 for a list of the forms and records
required.
2-7. Cleaning Instructions and Precautions. | Cleaning is an after-operation
service performed by operator crew to keep the vehicle in a state of readiness. Facilities
and material available to operators for vehicle cleaning can vary greatly in differing
operating conditions. However, vehicles must be maintained in as clean a condition as
available cleaning equipment, materials, and tactical situations permit.
a. General Cleaning Precautions.
(1) All cleaning procedures must be accomplished in well-venitlated areas.
(2 ) Protective gloves, clothing, and or respiratory equipment must be worn whenever
caustic, toxic, or flammable cleaning solutions are used.
(3) Diesel fuel or gasoline must never be used for cleaning.
(4) A fire extinguisher must be available and ready during all cleaning operations
involv ing solvents.
b. Special Cautions.
(1) Do not allow cleaning compounds to come into contact with rubber, leather,
vinyl, or canvas materials.
(2) Do not allow corrosion-removing cleaning compounds to contact painted
surfaces.
(3) Do not use pressure steam or air in cleaning truck cab interiors or van body
interiors.
(4 ) Mildew must be removed with a bristle brush before canvas paulin can be properly
cleaned and aired.
;
(5 ) The radiator is always cleaned f irst I torn behind in order to blow debris, insects, or
other obstructions out and away from the radiator core, l ow pressure water, air,
or steam can be used in cleaning radiator core of obstructions.
c. Cleaning Materials. Detailed descriptions of specific cleaning compounds, cleaning
solvents, drycleaning solutions, and corrosion-removing compounds are found in TM 9-247.
d. General Guidelines. Table 2-1 provides a general guideline to cleaning materials
used in removing contaminants from various vehicle surfaces.
TA 090143
2-35
Page 84
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-1 . General Cleaning Instructions
Cleaning Materials Used to Remove
Surface Oil/Grease Salt /Mud/Dust/Debris Surface Rust/Corrosion
Body Grease-elea ning
compound: cold,
running water: rags.
High pressure water steam;
soapy, warm water; soft
brush; damp and dry rags.
Corrosion-removing com
pound; bristle brush; dry rags:
lubricating oil.*
Cab Interior
(Metals)
Grease-cleaning
compound: damp
and dry rags.
Damp and dry rags. Corrosion-removing com
pound: bristle brush: dry rags,
lubricating oil.*
Cab Interior
(Glass)
Issued glass cleaning
solution; clean, dry
rags.
Issued solution: clean, dry rag. Not applicable.
Cab 1 ntcrior
(Material)
Saddle soap; warm
water, soft brush,
and dry rags.
Soft brush: soapy, warm
water; damp and dry rags.
Not applicable.
Frame Grease-cleaning
compound rinsed
with cold, running
water: rags.
High pressure water steam:
soapy, warm water, wire
brush: clamp and dry rags.
Corrosion-removing com
pound: wire brush, dry rags,
lubricating oil.*
Engine
Transmission
M ixed solution
l-part grease-
cleaning compound.
4-parts dry cleaning
so Kent: cold,
running water: rags.
High pressure water steam:
soapy, warm water: soft
wire brush: damp and dry
rags.
Bristle brush; warm, soapy
water; dry rags.
Glass Issued glass cleaning
solution: clean,
dry rags.
Issued glass cleaning
solution: clean, dry rags.
Not applicable.
Radiator Not applicable. Low pressure water steam
air: soapy, warm water: damp
and dry rags.
Not applicable.
Rubber
Insulation
Saddle soap: damp
and dry rags.
Saddle soap: damp and
dry rags.
Not applicable.
Tires Soapy water: steam:
bristle brush.
High pressure water steam:
bristle brush.
Not applicable.
Wire Rope Cleaning com
pound; wire brush.
Wire brush. Wire brush: lubricating oil.*
Wood Detergent: warm
water: damp and
dry rags.
l ow pressure water: soapy,
warm water; damp and dry
rags.
Not applicable.
•After cleaning, apply light grade of lubricating oil to all unprotected surfaces to prevent continued
rust.
TA 090144
2-36
Page 85
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-8. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)
a. Designated Intervals.
NOTE
Observe eautions and warnings.
(1) BEFORE checks and services (B) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE must be
performed prior to placing vehicle, or its components, in operation.
(2) DURING checks and services (D) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE will be
performed while the vehicle and or its components systems are in operation.
(3) AFTER checks and services (A) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are
performed upon completion of mission.
(4) WEEKLY checks and services (W) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are
performed once every seven days.
(5) MONTHLY checks and services (M) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are
performed once every 30 days.
b. Procedures.
(1) Troubleshoot malfunctions. Refer to table 3-1. Or. notify supervisor.
(2) Use form DA 2404 and report non-repairable item(s) to organizational
maintenance at once.
(3) Tools included with vehicle are to be used when making PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE checks and services. Also, wiping cloths are sometimes needed to
remove dirt or grease.
c. Troublespots.
NOTE
Dirt, grease, oil. ;ind debris may cover up ;i serious problem. Clean as you
check. Following precautions printed on container, use drv cleaning solvent
(SD-2) )item 47. appendix D) on all metal surfaces. On rubber or plastic-
material, use soap and water.
(1) Check all bolts, nuts, and screws. It loose, bent, broken, or missing, either
tighten or report conditions to organizational maintenance.
(2) Look for loose or chipped paint, and rust or gaps at welds. II a bad weld is
found, report situation to organizational maintenance.
(3) Inspect electrical wires and connectors for cracked or broken insulation. Also
look for bare wires, and loose or broken connections, l ighten loose connections.
Report other problems to organizational maintenance.
TA 090145
2-37
Page 86
9M060VI
eeumreimnui|auoiinziui?droo\rorosmepnsrnovoiApteidemmi
edrtopreeqtsnius)\v.d\\\\ssiqjSJlAld0LHu!deJinbaisus|eae|
dinyjjwqes.)|a3|11ro|nsepqqwSmiarepoenq/v\ROsiAdJdllSHflOA
AdllON'lanODNlN3HAAUi.nsXsiuei(heifoUiepaaedinuredisuoe
•esrnoefotsniuno\ei?b>ji?e|||ro\ssfipqtiweiqi?/\vo||HsiuoitnerpQ
NOiinvo
depepsuide>peqe
tfuieqiueiieqtluorf||a|inqispodrUIorJotqtfnoentnretfe3b>jbe']7//vvo/j\j
depepsuide>peqetfiqeqluetiluorfpud
01spodresm;eotqrinouetoutnqspodriurof0}qtfnouetnre3ar?a>p;eq7/vvu/j(/
spo.ip
lu.io|01qnnom\kmHtouuoiti!JO|oesipjoss.uuowvqpotiMipm.Lii^iM17/;
:odinribsn3ui/*vo||ofoqios|]11irodor\nuoofopj0u.^o.iqf|ij
UOtqiill\>SOO|SIJOJ.UUUOOJOt?UIJJl|I!IIOi?B)|BO|SOJOU.q)OS|l!LI11?JSyM.il!>|SOJirOidm
suoueeuuoorosi?ujui|-sio5|sijii's|i?esdunori:ss.uu\\\paBesjeenia>|se9pueno6Z
srteptfuissiiuouqtiaadun.eeiqpiqdireqtui,/qqiuessa
ubskuoitb||btsuiroftenuopiuoeqene>peqj);yHi)MOigroX|ifiiMssyi.wrjoja
l~phri;p>retpnqj
.05>Z.8-tIA1.L°lJ3.PR.«->|qa|iaAaiinroAdnretousi?detropereq\[mtueiupinbe
'uoissiUJdequesodeqtuuofrepote|qntousiepiqeAb\\uoiiipuojX|wjy10^p
('s^BOIUOUOIJBIUJOJUIJOJfrlaJl?p.w^)ihgtireasSujuy
dunspmsprense>|i?[ajs>p?e|dui?*3§aUida'rbemrofseui|dinydunsesoq>poqj)p)
Qi-ZLlOlZl-bWl
8Z-Z
Page 87
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operatorj Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
ITEM
NO.B D A W M
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
NOTE
Perform Weekly (W) as well
as Before (B) PMCS' if:
a. You are the assigned operator but have not
operated vehicle since the last weekly.
b. You are operating the vehicle for the first
time.
1 EXTERIOR OF VEHICLE
MAKE THE FOLLOWING
WALK-AROUND CHECKS:
• a. Visually check for obvious damage to body
and cab that would impair operation.
• b. Check tires for cuts, gouges, or cracks.
Remove all penetrating objects.
Tires have cuts, gouges,
or cracks which would
result in tire failure
during operation. One or
more tires missing or flat
and no spare available.
• c.
d.
Look under vehicle for evidence of fluid
leakage (fuel, oil, and coolant).
Any fuel leakage.
Class III leakage of oil
or coolant is evident.
Check condition of:
•
•
(1) Windshield and windows
(2) Windshield wiper arms and blades
• (3) Mirrors
•
•
(4) All locking and fastening devices
(5) Spare tire mounting
•
•
(6) Check operation of doors and
windows.
(7) Check operation of headlights,
tail lights, and turn signals.
TA 092287
Change 1 2-39
Page 88
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
TIRES
a. Gage tires for correct air pressure using
tire inflation gage and hose assembly.
Adjust as necessary.
PRESSURE RATING (approximate)
FRONT REAR
VEHICLE
(TIRE SIZE)
Standard
(psi)
H CC
Metric
(kPa)
H CC
Standard
(psi)
H CC
Metric
(kPa)
H CC
M923,M924,M925,M926,
M927,M928,M929,M930,
M931,M932,M934,M935
(11:00x20) 90 60 551 413 50 30 344 206
M936 (11:00 x 20) 70 60 482 413 70 60 482 413
All Models: Mud, Sand
and Snow 25 25 172 172 25 25 172 172
H: Highway
CC: Cross Country
Check tire tread (I) depth. Tread (1)
should not be less than i/s-inch thick.
On tires with wear bars, tread (1) should
not be worn beyond level of wear bar.
c. Ensure all wheel stud nuts are tight using
wheel stud nut wrench and handle.
Equipment is not ready
if tread is less than
i/g-inch thick or worn
beyond level of wear
bar.
TA 092288
2-40 Change 1
Page 89
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
BDAWM
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
EXHAUST SYSTEM
WARNING
Do not touch hot exhaust
pipes with bare hands.
Severe burns will result.
NOTE
If exhaust pipes, muffler,
or manifold leak or are rusted
through, report deficiency
to organizational maintenance.
Listen for exhaust pipes (2),
muffler (4), and manifold
(3) leaks and inspect for
rusted-through condition. I
TA 092289
Change 1 2-41
Page 90
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
FUEL FILTER
CAUTION
If one quart or more of fuel
must be drained from fuel filter (1)
before fuel is clear, fuel
tanks and fueling source must
be inspected carefully. Report fuel
contamination to organizational
maintenance.
Open petcock (2) and drain into a container.
If there are large amounts of water and
impurities, allow fuel to drain until fuel is
clear, and check fuel tank(s) for contamination.
Close petcock.
TA 092290
2-42 Change 1
Page 91
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
FUEL SYSTEM
WARNING
Do not perform fuel system
checks or inspection while
smoking or near fire, flames,
or sparks. Fuel could ignite,
causing damage to vehicle,
severe injury, or death.
a. Inspect fuel tank(s) (3) for leaks
and broken supports.
Check fuel lines and hoses for leakage
and damage. Make sure all connec
tions are secure.
Any fuel leakage evident
Fuel tank(s), lines, and
support straps are
damaged.
II1
ll
J.*
[
li U Li
TA 092291
Change 1 2-43
Page 92
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
AIR RESERVOIR DRAINCOCKS
a. Check security of mounting of drain-
cocks to tool box mounting bracket.
b. Open draincocks and drain moisture
from:
(1). Primary airbrake system air reservoir
(2) Secondary airbrake system air
reservoir
(3) Airbrake system wet tank reservoir
(4) Spring brake air reservoir
NOTE
Make sure draincocks are
closed tight before next
operation of the vehicle.
TA 092292
2-44 Change 1
Page 93
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bafore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
I l I
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
BATTERIES
WARNING
Don't smoke, have open flames,
or make sparks around the
batteries, especially if the caps
are off. They can explode
and cause injury.
NOTE
Batteries are located under crew
seat in cab. Unlatch, raise, and
secure crew seat (5) with retaining
bar to gain access to battery
compartment (6).
a. Check fluid level.
TA 092293
Change 1 2-45
Page 94
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthry
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED
EQUIPMENT IS
ITEMB D A W M
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:NO.
NOTE
If fluid level is low, or is
boiling, notify organizational
maintenance.
• b. Visually inspect batteries for cracked or
leaking casing and broken or burnt
terminal posts.
• c. Visually inspect battery compartment
for corrosion.
UNDERBODY
8 POWER STEERING ASSIST CYLINDER
• a. Inspect power steering assist cylinder (1)
for damage and leaks.
Cuts, breaks, abra
sions or Class III
leaks.
9
•
•
b. Check fluid lines for defects and leaks.
FRAME
Cuts, breaks, abra
sions, or Class III
leaks.
Visually inspect frame side rails, crossmembers.
and underbody supports for loose or broken
bolts, cracks, breaks, broken welds, and rusted-
through conditions.
10 DIFFERENTIALS
• Visually inspect front and rear differentials for
oil leaks.
TA 092294
2-46 Change 1
Page 95
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
11
12
TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFER
a. Check all hose connections within reach
on transmission for looseness. Tighten
loose connections. Inspect connections
for damage.
b. Check all hose connections within reach
on transfer for looseness. Tighten loose
connections. Inspect connections for
damage.
c. Visually check transmission and transfer
for damage and leakage.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
RIGHT SIDE
Hi
Evidence of damage
or Class III leaks.
SURGE TANK
a. Check coolant level in surge tank (2).
Tank should be at a minimum 3/4 full
before operation. Fill if necessary.
h Check all hoses (3) for deterioration
and/ or leakage. Tighten loose, leaking
hose connections.
Cuts, breaks, abra
sions, or Class 111
leaks.
TA 092295
Change 1 2-47
Page 96
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
13 ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CAUTION
Withdraw dipstick (1) slowly. A
false reading can result if dipstick is
withdrawn too quickly.
NOTE
Engine oil level is checked with
engine stopped and with dipstick (I)
removed, wiped clean, and slowly
reinserted for a reading.
Pull out dipstick and check for proper oil level.
Level should be between L (low) and H (high)
marks. Add oil as necessary.
CAUTION
Do not overfill.
TA 092296
2-48 Change 1
Page 97
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
14 PULLEY BELTS
15
Check for cracking, fraying, and breaks
on alternator drive belt (4), fan belts (2),
and power steering pump drive belts (3).
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
LEFT SIDE
POWER STEERING PUMP
a. Check pump (5) for leakage.
b. Visually inspect pump hoses (6)
for deterioration and leaks.
Belts are cracked,
frayed, broken, or
missing.
Evidence of damage or
Class III leaks.
Cuts, breaks, abra
sions, or Class III
leaks. I
TA 092297
Change 1
Page 98
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bsfore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
16 WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR
17
18
Check fluid level in reservoir (1). If less
than half full, fill with washer fluid.
ALCOHOL EVAPORATOR
Check fluid level. Fill with alcohol if
bottle (2) is less than 2/ 3 full.
INTERIOR OF VEHICLE
ENGINE OPERATION
a. Start engine. Check idle speed and
instruments (see item 19).
b. Listen for unusual noises or vibrations,
especially during acceleration.
Bottle damaged; empty
(cold weather opera
tions only).
Engine inoperative.
Unusual noises or
vibrations.
TA 092298
Change 1
Page 99
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
19 INSTRUMENTS
With transmission in neutral and engine
at idle, check the following instrument
readings:
a. Air cleaner indicator (3).
b. Tachometer (4).
c. Primary air pressure gage (6).
d. Battery indicator gage (7) needle.
e. Secondary air pressure gage (8).
/ Engine oil pressure gage (10).
g. Fuel gage (1 1) indicates fuel.
h. Engine coolant temperature gage
(5).
i. Transmission oil temperature gage
(9)
Air cleaner indicator
stays in red.
Tachometer (4) reads
iless than 450 rpm or
more than 700 rpm.
Primary air pressure
gage (6) reads less than
60 psi (413 kPa).
Battery indicator needle
in red area.
Secondary air pressure
gage (8) reads less than
60 psi (413 kPa).
Engine oil pressure
reads less than 5 psi
(34 kPa).
Temperature gage (5)
reads greater than
225°F (107°C).
Oil temperature exceeds
325° F (163°C).
TA 092299
Change 1 2-51
Page 100
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
20 TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL
NOTE
Start engine, engage vehicle
brakes and move trans
mission control lever through
all forward gears and reverse
before checking oil level in
neutral.
CAUTION
Withdraw transmission dipstick (4)
slowly. Removing dipstick (4)
too quickly creates a vacuum
within the filler tube which
may result in a false oil level
reading.
TA 092300
2-52 Change 1
Page 101
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bsfore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
ITEM
NO.B D A W M
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
CAUTION
Do not permit dirt, dust or grit
to enter transmission filler tube.
Serious internal transmission
damage may result if trans
mission is contaminated.
• After thoroughly cleaning access door (1),
dipstick handle (2), and end of filler tube, check
for proper oil level with transmission in neutral
and engine at idle. If transmission oil tempera
ture gage indicates 180°F (82° C) or below, level
on dipstick (4) should show between marks
designated for normal run (3).
Add transmission oil as necessary. Refer to
LO 9-2320-272-12.
CAUTION
Do not overfill transmission.
21 BRAKE SYSTEM
a. With the air system charged fully
(120 psi), engine off, and parking
brake set, walk around vehicle and:
•
•
(1) Listen for leaks in the air system
air reservoir, lines and hoses.
Any reservoirs or lines
and hoses are leaking.
(2) Visually check brake chamber and
air reservoirs for obvious damage.
Visually check hoses and lines
for cracks, chaffing, etc.
• b. Operate service brakes to determine
stopping ability. Check for any pulling,
grabbing, or other abnormal operation.
Service brakes do not
operate properly.
• c. Determine parking brake ability to hold
vehicle by first engaging hand brake,
then engage transmission. Vehicle
should not move.
TA 4)92301
Change 1 2-53
Page 102
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
I i i
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
BDAWM
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
22
23
STEERING SYSTEM
CAUTION
Do not overfill power steering
reservoir.
When engine temperature gage reaches
normal operating temperature 165°F to
195°F (74° C to 90.5° C), stop engine, open
hood and check power steering reservoir
(1) with dipstick in filler cap. If fluid
is below full mark, add as necessary.
Check vehicle steering for unusual
freeplay, binding, wander or shimmy.
TRANSMISSION
Shift transmission in all ranges observing
any unusual stiffness or binding of shifting
linkage.
Loose or binding steering
action or steering wheel
difficult to turn.
Steering inoperative.
jTransmission is inopera
tive.
TA 092302
2-54 Change 1
Page 103
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
24
25
26
27
TRANSFER
CAUTION
Do not exceed the maximum road
speeds permitted in HIGH or
LOW transfer ranges. Do not use
reverse gear with transfer in LOW
range. The maximum speed /gear
ranges are:
Transfer is inoperative.
Transmission Transfer Case
HIGH
mph km
LOW
mph km
"1-5" (Drive) 52 84 22 35
"1-4" (Fourth) 43 69 17 27
"1-3" (Third) 33 53 13 21
"1-2" (Second) 25 40 10 16
"1" (First) 12 19 5 8
"R" (Reverse) 5 8 — —
Check shifting operation for unusual noises,
stiffness, or jumping out of gear.
HORNS
Check for operation if tactical situation permits.
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
W W Icq J I O I
Put front wheel drive lock-in switch (3) to IN
position. Make sure front wheel drive
engagement light (2) is on.
FRONT AND REAR DRIVE AXLES AND
PROPELLER SHAFTS
Listen for unusual noises or vibrations.
Vibrations, clicking, or clunking noise indicates
worn U-joints or damaged propeller shafts.
Unusual noises or
vibrations are
evident.
TA 092303
Change 1 2-55
Page 104
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
ITEM
NO.B D A W M
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
SPECIAL BODY EQUIPMENT
28 FRONT WINCH
•
(BEFORE OPERATING WINCH)
(M925,M926,M928,M930,M932,M936)
a. Check hydraulic tank oil level by using
crescent wrench to loosen and remove
filler cap, and pull out dipstick. Oil level
should be above fourth groove from
bottom of dipstick (1). If low, fill to
top notch. After check, make sure filler
cap is wrench-tight.
■
NOTE
See item (41) procedure (a) for
method of checking hydraulic oil
level for M936 vehicle.
• b. Visually inspect winch hoses and lines for
deterioration and leakage.
Class III leaks evident.
• c. Check for secure connections.
29
•
•
FRONT WINCH OPERATION
a. Check all winch controls for proper
operation. No control response.
b. Check cable for kinks, frays, and breaks. Cable is kinked,
frayed, broken or
missing.
TA 092304
2-56 Change 1
Page 105
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bsfore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
ITEMB D A W M
PROCEDURE: Check for and
'have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:NO.
CARGO TRUCKS
(M923,M924,M925,M926,M927,M928)
30 BODY SIDES
• a. Check cargo body sides for damage,
broken welds, and rusted-through
conditions.
•
•
b. Check cargo body side racks for
cracks and breaks.
c. Make sure troop seat retainers are
present and secure.
31 TAILGATE
•
•
a. Inspect tailgate for damage, security,
and ease of movement.
b. Inspect retaining pins for damage.
DUMP TRUCKS
(M929.M930)
32 DUMP BODY
• Inspect dump body and cab protector for dents,
cracks, broken welds, loose or broken bolts, and
rusted-through conditions. Make sure all bolts
securing cab protector to dump body are tight.
33 TAILGATE
•
•
a. Inspect tailgate for damage, security, and
ease of movement.
b. Check condition and security of:
(1) Tailgate chains
(2) Latches, brackets, and retaining pins.
(3) Tailgate wings and harness hooks.
TA 092305
Change 1 2-57
Page 106
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
I I i
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
34
35
TAILGATE CONTROL LINKAGE
Check for proper operation of tailgate control
linkage by:
a. Pulling tailgate control rod hand lever (1)
forward and down to unlock tailgate
latches.
b. Pushing lever (1) up and back to lock
tailgate.
HYDRAULIC TANK OIL LEVEL
a. Check hydraulic tank (6) oil level
by using crescent wrench to loosen
and remove filler cap. and pull out
dipstick. Oil level should be above
fourth groove from bottom of dipstick
(2). If low, fill to top notch.
After check, make sure filler cap is
wrench-tight.
b. Check tank for damage and leakage. Evidence of Class III
leaks.
TA 093306
2-58 Change 1
Page 107
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bfifore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
I 1 I
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
36 HYDRAULIC HOIST
WARNING
Stay clear of dump body
and cab protector at all
times during loading and
unloading operations. The
dump body can unexpectedly
raise when overloaded or
when a heavy load is
dropped into the dump
body. This can result in
serious injury.
a. Check PTO (3), drive shaft (4).
hydraulic pump (5). and control valve (8)
for damage, leakage, and security of
mounting.
b. Inspect cylinders (7) for damage, leakage,
and security of mounting to subframe.
c. Inspect all hydraulic lines and hoses for
signs of deterioration and leakage.
d. Operate dump hoist through raising,
holding, and lowering positions to check
performance. Inspect pivot points for
binding.
Class III leaks evident.
Evidence of Class III
leaks.
Evidence of Class III
leaks. Dump hoist
inoperative.
Change 1
TA 092307
2-58.1 (2-58.2 blank)
Page 109
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
37 FIFTH WHEEL
(M93I.M932)
a. Check fifth wheel (9) for loose or missing
capscrews securing it to vehicle side rails. I
TA 092308
Change 1 2-59
Page 110
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Cheeks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
B D A W M
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
38
b. Inspect fifth wheel and approach plates
for bends and damage.
c. Couple and uncouple tractor to determine
if fifth wheel works properly.
TRAILER CONNECTING ACCESSORIES
(M931,M932)
Check trailer supply valve (1) for proper
operation by pushing in valve to supply
air to brake system of towed trailer or
semitrailer.
b. Inspect electrical cable and connector (2)
for cracks, breaks, and other damage.
c. Inspect emergency airbrake hose line (3),
service airbrake hose line (4), and
couplings for damage, deterioration, and
leakage.
Faulty coupling or
uncoupling action.
Valve does not supply
air to brake system
of towed trailer or
semitrailer.
Cable is broken.
Hoses or couplings are
damaged or leaking.
TA 092309
2-60 Change 1
Page 111
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M- Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
ITEM
NO.
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
B D A W M
39 BRAKE LOCK SWITCH
(M936)
•
•
Check brake lock switch (5) for proper operation.
40
41
FLOODLIGHTS AND
WRECKER WARNING LIGHT
(M936)
Inspect floodlights and amber warning light
for operation.
WRECKER CRANE
(M936)
a. Check hydraulic oil level with dipstick in
filler cap (6). Oil level should be at
"FULL" mark. If low, add as necessary but
do not overfill.
TA 092310
Change 1 2-61
Page 112
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. Operator-/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bsfore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
ITEM PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
B D A W MNO.
b. Check for condition of:
(1) Shipper brace assemblies
(2) Boom jacks, base plates, and tie bar
(3) Retaining pins and brackets
(4) Cable hook
(5) Outriggers and foot pads. Outriggers or foot pads
are missing or damaged.
WARNING
Always lower outriggers before
operating the crane.
Q jfT! \\\h \ T
1 \ / II i! ! ^-Eo^Pf
i / v hi. i Pi
ijii U
\*^
© ©
_ % 9 I
• c. Check PTO (1), drive shaft (2), Evidence of Class III
leaks.hydraulic pump (3), and control valve (4)
for damage, leakage, and security of
mounting.
TA 092311
2-62 Change 1
Page 113
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED
EQUIPMENT IS
ITEMB D A W M
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:NO.
• d. Inspect all hydraulic lines and hoses for
leaks, abrasions, and damaged fittings.
Evidence of Class III
leaks.
• e. Operate crane through full range of
elevation, rotation, and boom extension
to determine performance of crane,
hoist, and crane controls. Movement
should be free and without hydraulic
leaks.
Crane is inoperative.
Class III leaks evident.
42
•
REAR WINCH AND CONTROLS
(M936)
/ Inspect hoist cable for breaks, kinks, and
frays. Check sheaves for damage.
• a. Remove oil level plug from winch gear
case. If level is below level plug hole, fill to
bottom of hole.
• b. Visually check winch hoses and lines for
signs of deterioration and leakage.
Cuts, breaks, abra
sions, or evidence
of Class III leaks.
• c. Check for secure connections.
•
•
d. Check cable for kinks, frays, and breaks.
EXPANSIBLE VANS
(M934.M935)
e. Check all winch controls for proper
operation.
No control response.
43 HYDRAULIC LIFT GATE
(M935 Only)
• a. Inspect lift gate, lift arms, and support
assemblies for bends or breaks.
•
•
b. Inspect hydraulic hoses for leaks,
abrasions, and damaged fittings.
Evidence of Class III
leaks.
c. Operate hydraulic liftgate through full
range of movement to determine
performance and control response.
No control response.
TA 092312
Change 1 2-63
Page 114
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Bafore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED
EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
ITEM PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
B D A W MNO.
44 VAN EXTERIOR
• Check for condition and proper function Van will not expand.
of panels, doors, ladders, stabilizers,
receptacles, and power cable.
45
•
VAN ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
a. Operate all switches to determine that all Electrical system will not
function properly and that power ceiling operate.
lights are on.
• b. Open doors to determine reliability of
blackout switches.
• c. Visually inspect cables and harnesses for
abrasions, breaks, or loose connections.
• d. Operate liftgate interior controls to
determine if liftgate electrical controls
SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS
are working properly (M935 only).
46 A-FRAME KIT
a. Make sure cable is secure in pintle and
pintle is locked in closed position.
• b. Make sure all cable clamps are secure A-frame cable is frayed
and cable is not frayed or broken. or broken.
• c. Inspect A-frame for bends and secure
mounting at front bumper. Make sure it
is positioned at about a 60° angle.
• d. Inspect winch cable for kinks, frays, or Winch cable is frayed or
47 AIRBRAKE CONTROL KIT
breaks. broken.
• Before going on open road, make sure airbrake Trailer brakes do not
hand control lever is working properly by actuate.
moving lever down to apply brakes to towed
vehicle and moving lever up to release brakes.
TA 092313
2-64 Change 1
Page 115
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
ITEM PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
B D A W MNO.
48 ELECTRIC BRAKE KIT
• Make sure rheostat is set properly by Trailer brakes do
depressing service brake pedal to determine not actuate.
if electric brakes on towed vehicle are
applied. Adjust rheostat setting
if necessary.
49 ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT
• a. Inspect hardtop enclosure and quilted
engine compnrtment cover for good
condition.
• b. Inspect electric fuel pump and fuel lines Any fuel leakage evident
located near air cleaner assembly for Fuel pump inoperable.
damage and leakage.
c. Inspect fuel burning personnel and engine
coolant heaters for the following:
• (I) Fuel lines and connections for signs of Evidence of any fuel
leakage. leakage.
• (2) Make sure all coolant shutoff
cocks are open.
• (3) Engine coolant heater hoses for Evidence of Class III
abrasions and leakage. leaks.
• (4) Make sure air intake and Evidence of any exhaust
exhaust tubes are not leakage.
damaged and are free from
obstructions.
• (5) Check heater controls by
depressing indicator lamps to make
sure they illuminate.
• (6) Listen for unusual noises from
heaters during operation.
I
TA 092314
Change 1 2-65
Page 116
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.
B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly
INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS
NOT READY/
AVAILABLE IF:
ITEM
NO.
PROCEDURE: Check for and
have repaired, filled, or
adjusted as needed
B D A W M
50 DEEP WATER FORDING KIT
•
•
a. Tighten fuel tank filler cap(s).
b. Make sure all battery filler caps are
present and secure.
• c. Make sure transmission dipstick is
secured in filler tube.
• d. Check operation of control handle. Make
sure fording valves open and close.
TA 092315
2-66 Change 1
Page 117
TM 9-2320-272-10
Section III. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
2-10. General.
This section provides instructions for vehicle operations under moderate temperature,
humidity, and terrain conditions. For vehicle operations under unusual conditions, refer
to section IV of this chapter.
NOTE
Before you attempt to operate your vehicle be sure to perform the
preventive maintenance checks and services shown in table 2-2.
2-1 1 . Starting the Engine (Above +32°F) (0°C).
a. Make certain parking brakes are engaged. If not, apply brakes. Turn knob on the
end of handbrake lever handle (4) to adjust brake cable tension and pull up on
handbrake lever (4).
| b. Adjust operator's seat. Refer to page 2-7.
c. Adjust (left and right) rear view mirrors. Make sure both mirrors provide a clear
rear view.
d. Make sure vehicle front and side windows are clean. If not, clean windows before
attempting to start vehicle.
e. On vehicles with a front winch, make certain transmission power takeoff control
lever (3) is on DISENGAGE, and front winch control lever (2) is in "N" (neutral).
/ On vehicles so equipped, make certain transfer power takeoff control lever (5) is
locked in neutral (full forward) position. In dump models (M929, M930) this lever
serves as the dump body control lever. In such vehicles make certain control lever (5) is
locked in neutral (full up) position.
g. Place automatic transmission gearshift lever (1) in "N" (neutral) position.
TA 092316
Change 1 2-67
Page 118
TM 9-2320-272-10
h. Make sure emergency fuel cutoff lever
(15) is pushed in all the way.
i. Check air cleaner indicator (3). If red
appears, indicating air restriction, notify
organizational maintenance.
/ Place battery switch (6) in ON position.
k. Depress accelerator pedal (2).
CAUTION
Do not operate starter continuously for more than 10 seconds at
a time or with headlights on (which will drain the batteries). Wait
10 to 15 seconds between periods of starter operations.
/. Place ignition switch (7) in START position. Release lever after engine starts.
Lever will return automatically to RUN position.
m. If necessary, adjust hand throttle control (5) until tachometer (8) indicates engine
is operating at 700 to 800 rpm.
n. Allow engine to warm up approximately five minutes at 700 to 800 rpm. If
engaged, unlock hand throttle control (5) by turning it left or right, and push it in to
allow engine speed to drop to idle after warm-up period.
|ll II H
TA 092317
2-68 Change 1
Page 119
TM 9-2320-272-10
o. Check your instruments:
CAUTION
If any instrument reading is not normal, stop engine by turning
ignition switch (7) and battery switch (6) to OFF positions and
notify organizational maintenance.
(1) Air/reservoir pressure gages (10) and (12) should rise from 0 to 90 psi (0 to
620.5 kPa) before warning light (4) goes out and warning buzzer stops. Normal
operating pressures for both gages is 120 psi (827 kPa).
(2) Oil pressure gage (13) should register 15 psi (103.4 kPa).
(3) Battery-generator indicator (11) should read in green area.
(4) Fuel gage (14) indicates fuel level in fuel tank(s).
p. Pull out emergency fuel cutoff lever (15) if any of the following conditions occur:
(1) Noisy engine and/or excessive engine vibration.
(2) Oil pressure does not register or suddenly drops to less than 15 psi (103.4 kPa)
as indicated by oil pressure gage (13).
(3) Sudden increase in coolant temperature beyond normal operating temperature.
165°F to I95°F (74° C to 90°C) as indicated by engine coolant temperature gage (9).
(4) Engine continues to run after ignition switch (7) and battery switch (6) are
turned to OFF positions.
NOTE
If emergency shutdown was necessary, notify organizational
maintenance.
q. Turn vehicle light switch (16) to STOPLIGHT position.
TA 090176
•
2-69
Page 120
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-12. Cold Weather Starting (Below +32°F) (0°C).
a. Perform steps a through / on pages
2-67 and 2-68.
b. Depress cold start button (I) during
cranking and hold in for three seconds.
Upon releasing button, allow three seconds,
for ether to discharge into system.
CAUTION
Do not operate starter continuously for more than 10 seconds at
a time or with headlights on. Wait 10 to 15 seconds between
periods of starter operation.
c. Perform steps 2a through 2c if fuel
pump needs to be primed on page 3-30.
NOTE
If engine cranks, but will not start, turn battery switch (3) to off
position and notify organizational maintenance of ether cold start
failure or fuel system failure.
d. Release ignition switch lever (4) after engine starts. Lever (4) returns
automatically to RUN position.
e. If engine needs additional ether to prevent stalling perform stepb again. Once
engine reaches 98° F (37° C), ether can no longer be discharged into system.
/ Check your instruments! Refer to items o(l) through o(4) on page 2-69.
g. Adjust hand throttle control (2) until tachometer (5) indicates engine is operating
at 700 to 800 rpm.
h. Allow engine to warm up approximately ten minutes at 700-800 rpm. After warm-
up period, unlock hand throttle control (2) by turning it left or right and push control
(2) in, to allow engine speed to drop to normal idle.
/. Stop engine immediately by pulling out emergency fuel cut-off lever (7) if at any
time one or more of the following conditions arise:
(1) Noisy engine and /or excessive engine vibration.
(2) Oil pressure docs not register or suddenly drops to less than 5 psi (34 kPa) at
idle, or 38 psi (262 kPa) when vehicle is in motion (normal operation).
TA 092318
2-70 Change 1
Page 121
TM 9-2320-272-10
(3) Sudden increase in engine coolant temperature as indicated by gage (6).
Normal operating temperature is 165°F to 195°F (74°C to 90°C).
(4) Engine continues to run after ignition switch lever (4) and battery switch lever
(3) are turned off.
/'. After emergency shutdown, have above conditions corrected by organizational
maintenance before attempting to restart engine.
NOTE
After engine stops, exit vehicle, raise the hood and manually
reposition fuel cut-off valve (9) located on the left side of engine
above the fuel pump (8). Move valve from cut-off position (9a)
to operating position (9).
TA 092319
Change 1 2-71
Page 122
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-13. Placing and Sustaining Vehicle in Motion.
WARNING
Do not put vehicle in motion until warning light (8) and buzzer
stop. Air pressure gages (1 2) and (1 3) should indicate at least 90
psi (620 kPa). If warnings continue beyond three minutes and/or
pressure gages do not reach 90 psi (620 kPa), turn ignition switch
lever (10) and battery switch lever (9) to OFF positions and
notify organizational maintenance.
e. With transmission shift lever (l) in
neutral, select transfer driving range:
a. Be sure all auxiliary equipment and
tools are locked and stored for travel.
b. Perform steps a through j in
paragraph 2-11.
c. Start engine. Refer to paragraph 2-11
and 2-12 on preceding pages for
instructions.
d. Set vehicle light switch (7). See
paragraph 2-16 for light switch operating
instructions.
CAUTION
Do not shift transfer (3) from
HIGH (3b) to LOW (3a) or
LOW to HIGH unless
transmission (1) is in "N"
(neutral) position.
(1) Depress lockout switch (2) and
shift transfer shift lever (3) down to HIGH
gear position (3b) for normal driving
conditions.
(2) Depress lockout switch (2) and
shift transfer shift lever (3) up to LOW gear
position (3a) if vehicle is heavily loaded,
facing a steep grade, and/or operating off
the road.
/ Depress brake pedal (6).
g. Disengage mechanical and spring
parking brake handbrake lever (4) by
pushing the lever full forward to the floor.
TA 092320
2-72 Change 1
Page 123
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Do not back up without a ground guide.
h. Engage vehicle transmission (1).
(1) Select "1-5" (drive) if operation is on good roads, grades, and traffic
conditions.
(2) Select "1-4" (fourth) gear if operation is over moderately hilly road grades,
moderate traffic, restricted road speeds.
(3) Select "1-3" (third) gear if traffic is slow, heavy, and /or speed limits are low.
(4) Select "1-2" (second) gear if operation is over steep grades, in heavy traffic,
and/or rough terrain.
(5) Select "1" (first) when starting under heavy loads, operating on extreme grades,
and/or rough terrain.
/'. Release brake pedal (6) and depress accelerator pedal (5). Accelerate at a safe,
steady speed.
CAUTION
• Do not allow engine speed to exceed 2IOOrpm in any transmission
gear ratio, as shown on the tachometer (II).
• Do not accelerate at full power when upshifting or downshifting
from or to forward driving range "I" (first).
/'. Upshift or downshift transmission shift lever (I) whenever road and/or traffic
conditions change.
TA 092321
Change 1 2-73
Page 124
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Do not coast downhill with transmission in "N" (neutral). Vehicle
may go out of control.
CAUTION
• Do not shift transfer shift lever (6) when transmission is in gear.
Transmission must be in "N" (neutral) before shifting transfer gear
from HIGH to LOW or LOW to HJGH.
• Never shift transfer shift lever (6) from HIGH gear to LOW
gear range until vehicle is slowed down to 22 miles per hour
(35.4 kilometers per hour) or less.
k. Upshift or downshift transfer shift lever (6) as required by vehicle speed and/or
changes in road or traffic conditions.
(1) To shift transfer shift lever (6) from HIGH (6b) to LOW (6a) when vehicle is
in motion:
(a) Slow vehicle to 22 miles per hour (35.4 kilometers per hour) or less as
indicated by speedometer (1).
(b) Shift transmission shift lever (2) to "N" (neutral) gear position (3).
(c) Depress lockout switch (5) with thumb and shift transfer shift lever from HIGH
(6b) up to LOW (6a) position.
(d) Release transfer shift lever (6) and shift transmission shift lever (2) into "1-5"
(drive) (4).
(2) To shift transfer shift lever (6) from LOW (6a) to HIGH (6b) when vehicle is in
motion:
(a) Shift transmission shift lever (6) to "N" (neutral) (3).
TA 092322
2-74 Change 1
Page 125
TM 9-2320-272-10
(b) Depress lockout switch (5) with thumb and shift transfer shift lever (6) down to
HIGH (6b) position.
(c) Release transfer shift lever (6) and shift transmission shift lever (2) into "1-5"
(drive) (4).
/. Apply brake pedal (9) on-and-off as needed when going down a grade.
WARNING
Do not back up without a ground guide.
CAUTION
Do not back up with transfer shift lever (6) in LOW driving range
(6a).
m. To drive in reverse:
(1) Stop vehicle. Refer to a and b, paragraph 2-14.
(2) Have another person act as a ground guide \jo direct backup operation.
(3) Place transmission shift lever (2) in "R" (reverse) position (7).
(4) Release brake pedal (9) and slowly depress accelerator pedal (8).
(5) Observe directions from ground guide.
(6) Release accelerator pedal (8) and apply brake pedal (9) to stop vehicle.
NOTE
Park on hard surface if possible.
TA 092323
Change 1 2-75
Page 126
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-14. Stopping the Vehicle and Engine.
a. Release accelerator pedal (3).
b. Apply service brakes (4) to bring
vehicle. to a gradual stop.
c. Move transmission shift lever (l) to
"N" (neutral) position (5).
NOTE
Park on hard surface if possible.
d. If vehicle must be backed into parking
position, have another person act as a
ground guide to direct backup operation
(para 2- 13, m).
e. Engage parking brakes by pulling up
on parking brake hand lever (2).
CAUTION
Do not shut down engine if engine temperature
gage (9) is above 195°F (90° C).
/ Let engine idle for five minutes if temperature gage (9)
reads above 195°F (90° C).
g. Turn vehicle light switch (6) to OFF position.
h. Place ignition switch lever (8) and battery switch lever
(7) in OFF position.
TA 092324
2-76 Change 1
Page 127
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Do not remove surge tank filler cap if temperature gage (9) reads
above 195°F (90°C). Do not add coolant when engine is hot
unless engine is running. Add coolant slowly.
/'. Pull out emergency fuel cutoff control (11) when any of the following conditions
occur:
(1) Noisy engine and/or excessive engine vibration.
(2) Oil pressure gage (10) does not register or suddenly drops to less than 15 psi
(103.4 kPa) at idle or 38 psi (262 kPa) when vehicle is in motion (normal operation).
(3) Sudden increase in coolant temperature.
(4) Engine continues to run after ignition switch (8) and battery switch (7) are in
OFF position.
/'. After emergency shutdown, notify organizational maintenance.
k. Perform After Operation services in table 2-2. Make log book entries prescribed
according to TM 38-750.
TA 090184
2-77
Page 128
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-15. Using Slave Receptacle to Start Engine.
a. Position right side of slaving (recharging) vehicle to the right side of vehicle
needing battery jump.
b. Stop slaving vehicle engine.
c. Pull cover (4) from slave receptacle (3) of disabled vehicle. Handle (1) on right side
of vehicle cab identifies receptacle location.
CAUTION
When slaving, always connect slave cable to disabled vehicle first.
Damage to batteries or cable may result from improperly connecting
hot batteries before connecting cable to receptacle of disabled
vehicle.
d. Connect slave cable (2) to disabled vehicle.
e. Pull cover (4) from slave receptacle (3) of slaving vehicle. Handle (1) on right side
of vehicle cab identifies receptacle location.
NOTE
Make sure all unnecessary electrical switches in both vehicles are
turned OFF.
/.' Start slaving vehicle engine. Pull out hand throttle control (5) until idle speed is at
1,000 to 1,100 rpm. Refer to paragraphs 2-1 1 and 2-12.
g. Start slaved vehicle engine.
h. After engine starts, disconnect slave cable (2) from both vehicles.
/. Put cover (4) back over receptacle (3).
j. Clean and stow slaving cable.
k. Operate slaved vehicle. If battery indicator dial (6) is in red or yellow area after
two hours of normal operation, notify organizational maintenance.
TA 090185
2-78
Page 129
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-16. Operation of Vehicle Service Lights.
NOTE
Unlock button (7) must be depressed to unlock light switch lever (8).
a. To illuminate instrument panel: turn switch lever (8) to either "SER DRV".
"PARK". "BLACKOUT MKR". or "BLACKOUT DRV", position.
b. For normal daylight driving, turn switch lever (8) to "STOP TURN" position.
c. For night driving, turn switch lever (8) to "SER DRV" position.
NOTE
Unlock switch (7) does not need to be depressed to unlock switch
lever (8) for either blackout position.
d. In blackout operation:
(1) Turn switch lever (8) to "BLACKOUT DRV" position when vehicle is
underway.
(2) Turn switch lever (8) to "BLACKOUT MKR" position when vehicle stops.
e. To illuminate parked vehicle at night, turn switch lever (8) to "PARK" position.
TA 090186
2-79
Page 130
TM 9-2320-272-10
LEVER POSITION
SER
DRV
STOP
TURN
B.O.
MKR
B.O.
DRVPARK OFF
SYSTEMS OPERATED
X X X , X PANEL LIGHT
X X X SERVICE STOP LIGHTS
X BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHTS
X X BLACKOUT MARKERS AND TAIL LIGHTS
X X XSERVICE TURN INDICATOR (LEFT AND
RIGHT)
X X X STOP LIGHTS
X X PARKING LIGHTS
X SERVICE HEAD LIGHTS
X X BLACKOUT STOP LIGHTS
/ Move turning signal lever (2) up for
right turns, down for left turns.
g. For hazard warning lights (blinking
lights):
(1) Turn main switch lever (1) to
STOP TURN position.
(2) Depress hazard tab button (3) and
move turning signal lever (2) up to lock tab
in position.
(3) To deactivate, move turning signal
lever (2) back to neutral. Hazard tab button
(3) will automatically disengage.
TA 092325
2-80 Change 1
Page 131
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-17. Raising and Securing Cab Hood.
a. General. All M939 vehicles are
equipped with a tilt hood which provides
easy access to the engine compartment.
b. Raising and Securing Hood.
(I) Release left and right hood latches |
(4)
(2) Remove retaining pin (8) from
safety bar hood bracket (6) and swing
safety bar (9) toward front of hood.
(3) % While standing against front
bumper, pull hood forward by grasping
hood handle (5).
I
(4) Once hood is raised, secure safety
bar (9) to bumper bracket (7) with hood
safety bar retaining pin (8).
WARNING
Make sure hood safety bar
retaining pin (8) is placed
completely through end of safety
bar (9) once bar is attached to
bumper bracket (7). Failure to
properly install retaining pin (8)
will result in serious injury or
damage to equipment.
TA 092326
Change 1 2-81
Page 132
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-18. Removing Cab Top and Lowering Windshield.
NOTE
This operation is best
accomplished by the operator and
one crewmember.
a. Roll down right and left cab windows.
b. Untie rope (3) from side handles (5).
c. Remove rope (3) from hooks (4) at the
rear of cab.
d. Release fasteners (l) from left and
right side roof rails (7) and rear interior of
cab.
e. From inside cab, push up paulin top (2) from pillar post channels (6). Fold top
over windshield.
2-82
Page 133
TM 9-2320-272-10
Ik. Loosen knobs (13) on left and right
sides of windshield frame with a hammer.
Knobs turn counterclockwise to loosen.
i. Lift up on crossbar (12) to free pillar
post (6) and crossbars from cab. Lower
crossbar and pillar post assembly to the
ground.
/ Reach over windshield frame (11) and
free windshield catches (15) from hood
mounts. Push catches forward and out of
the way.
/. Fold windshield frame (11) forward
toward hood (14). Lay frame gently on
hood.
m. Secure frame (11) in place with
windshield catches (15).
n. To install cab paulin top (2), reverse steps a through m.
o. Clean and fold paulin top (2). Refer to paragraph 2-7 for paulin cleaning
procedures.
p. Store paulin top (2), overhead staves (8), and crossbar assembly (12) as directed
by person in charge.
TA 092327
Change 1 2-83
Page 134
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-19. Operation of Front Winch.
a. Preparation for Use:
(1) Park vehicle directly facing object
to be winched. Place transmission shift
lever (1) in "N" (neutral) position.
NOTE
If vehicle cannot be parked in a
direct line with object to be
winched, see paragraph 2-19?.
(2) Engage parking brake by pulling
up hand brake lever (2).
(3) Turn ignition switch lever (4) and
battery switch lever (3) to OFF.
(4) Check oil level in hydraulic oil
reservoir (5). Refer to paragraph 2-4 for
locations of hydraulic oil reservoirs in
various models.
CAUTION
Before opening reservoir, make
sure the area around the reservoir
cap (6) is clean. Do not allow dirt,
dust, or rain to enter reservoir.
CAUTION
Do not proceed with winch
operation if oil level is less than
halfway from end of dipstick to
FULL mark (8) on wrecker
models or below the fourth
notch (7) from end of dipstick
on all other models. Fill to top
notch.
b. Unwinding Winch Cable.
(1) Free winch cable chain (9) and
hook from truck.
(2) Pull out drum lock knob (11),
rotate 90 degrees and release.
(3) On wrecker vehicles:
(a) Pull out level wind lock knob (10),
rotate 90 degrees and release.
(b) Pull out cable tensioner lock knob
(13) with left hand and push tensioner lever
(12) toward the right side of the vehicle
(crew side) with right hand. Release lock
knob (13).
TA 092328
2-84 Change 1
Page 135
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Wear leather gloves when
handling winch cable. Do not
allow cable to run through
hands. Broken wires cause
painful injuries.
(4) Pull out needed length of cable. Do
not allow cable to knot or kink.
(1) Attach utility chain (19) to lifting
shackles (20) or pintle hook of load.
(2) If load is very heavy or deeply
mired, install a snatch block (17) to
increase winch pulling power. To rig a
snatch block (17):
(a) Unwind enough cable to reach the
load and back to the front winch (14).
Attach cable chain hook (16) to lifting
shackle (15).
CAUTION
Leave at least four turns of
cable on winch drum. Refer to
table 1-10 for winch load
capacities.
c. Rigging the Load.
(b) Turn snatch block hook (23) to the
right. Lift up rear of snatch block (17) and
open support link (21). Insert cable (22).
Lift up rear of snatch block (17) to lower
and lock support link (21) to snatch block
hook. Return hook.
(c) Attach utility chain (19) to lifting shackles (20) or pintle hook of load. Attach
snatch block hook (23) to utility chain (19).
NOTE
Medium wrecker (M936) is equipped with field chocks ( 1 8) for heavy
recovery operations. Refer to paragraph 2-2 1 for field chock ( 18) use.
(3) Disengage the brakes, transmission, and transfer case of vehicle being retrieved.
TA 090192
2-85
Page 136
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Pulling Load.
WARNING
Direct all personnel to stand clear of cable. A snapped cable can
cause serious injuries.
NOTE
This operation requires two crewmembers.
(1) Start engine.
(2) Direct crewmember to release
hinged latch (2) and pull clutch lever (3) as
far back as it will go away from winch.
(3) On vehicles with level wind device
(1) direct crewmember to pull out tensioner
lever lock knob (5) and pull tensioner lever
(4) back. Aline lock knob (5) with hole in
tensioner housing and release.
(4) Put transfer case shift lever (6)
down to HIGH gear.
(5) With brakes engaged, place transmission shift lever (8) in "1-5" (drive) position
and pull transmission power takeoff lever (9) back to ENGAGED position. Return
transmission shift lever (8) to "N" (neutral) position.
WARNING
Do not operate winch at high speeds. Do not operate winch at erratic
speeds. High speed or erratic winding can result in a snapped cable.
(6) Pull front winch control lever (10)
back to WIND position. Hold for winding.
(7) On winches without level wind, be
sure each layer of cable winds evenly. If
necessary, push cable in place with a length
of wood.
(8) Regulate winch winding speed by
depressing accelerator pedal (7) or by
pulling out hand throttle control (11).
TA 092329
2-86 Change 1
Page 137
TM 9-2320-272-10
(9) Release winch control lever (10) to
stop winding. Lever spring returns to
neutral (lock) position.
CAUTION
If temperature is above 70° F
(21°C), stop winding operation
by releasing winch control lever
(10) after every 100 feet of cable
has been winched in. Rest six
minutes. During period of rest,
leave truck engine idling and
power takeoff control lever (9)
engaged.
(3) Attach snatch block (13) to winch
instructions if necessary.
e. Pulling Indirect Loads.
(1) If vehicle (16) cannot be lined up in
a direct line with load (12), line vehicle up
to a reliable go-between object such as a
large tree (15).
CAUTION
Do not proceed with front winch
operation if direct pull or use of a
go-between object is unavailable.
(2) Unwind enough cable (17) to reach
go-between object (15) and load (12). Refer
to b for unwinding cable instructions if
necessary.
able. Refer to c(2) for snatch block rigging
(4) Rig utility chain (14) from go-between object (15) to the snatch block (13).
Attach cable chain to pintle hook or lifting shackles of load (12). Refer to c for rigging
instructions if necessary.
(5) Wind cable. Stop winding when
cable chain reaches snatch block. Refer to d
for winding instructions if necessary.
(6) Briefly push front winch control
lever (10) forward to WINCH position.
Cable will unwind (loosen) to permit
removal of snatch block (13). Return winch
control lever (10) to neutral (lock)
position.
NOTE
If load is on a slope, block wheels
of load before loosening cable.
(7) Remove snatch block (13) and
utility chain (14).
(8) Continue winding operation.
TA 092330
Change 1 2-87
Page 138
TM 9-2320-272-10
/ Lifting and Lowering Loads.
(1) A-frame kit is used with front winch for lifting and lowering operations.
A-frame kit is installed and rigged by organizational maintenance. Refer to paragraph
2-306 for A-frame instructions.
WARNING
Vehicle will become charged with electricity if A-frame contacts
or breaks high voltage wire. Do not leave vehicle while high
voltage line is in contact with A-frame or vehicle. Serious or fatal
injury can result. Signal nearby personnel to have electrical
power turned off.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to lift loads heavier than 3,000 pounds with A-frame
kit.
(2) Rig winch cable chain and hook to load. Refer to c in paragraph 2-19 for
rigging instructions.
WARNING
Do not lower load without a ground guide. Direct all personnel to
stand clear of lifting operation. Swinging loads can cause serious
injury.
(3) To lift load, follow same winding
instructions as in d.
(4) To lower load:
(a) Push front winch control lever (2)
forward to WINCH position.
(b) Observe directions of ground
guide.
(c) After load has been lowered as
indicated by the ground guide, return
control lever (2) to neutral (lock) position.
(d) Direct crewmember to maintain
manual tension on cable while load is
unrigged.
g. After Winch Operation.
(1) Direct crewmember to maintain manual tension on cable.
(2) Pull front winch control lever (2) back to WIND.
(3) Watch crewmember for signal indicating cable chain coupling is approaching
drum.
TA 092331
2-88 Change 1
Page 139
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Release winch control lever (2) when signalled by crewmember.
(5) Direct crewmember to:
(a) Disengage drum clutch by pushing
clutch control lever (7) toward the winch.
CAUTION
Do not force clutch control lever
(7). If lever does not easily
disengage, slightly engage winch
control lever (2) in WIND until
clutch control lever (7) returns
without force.
(b) Swing latch (6) down to lock
clutch control lever (7) in disengaged
position.
(c) Pull out drum lock knob (8), rotate
90 degrees and release. If necessary, rotate
drum by hand to allow drum lock plunger
to engage.
(d) On winches with level wind device, manually push level wind (12) full to the
operator side of level wind frame. Pull out level wind lock knob (14), rotate 90 degrees
and release. If necessary, jiggle level wind to assure lock plunger engages.
(6) Push transmission power takeoff control lever (1) forward to DISENGAGE
position.
h. Preparing Winch for Travel.
(I) On winches without level wind:
(a) Put cable chain (11) under and over right frame extension then across the top
of bumper. Attach cable hook (10) to the left lifting shackle (9).
(b) Remove right lifting shackle (5) by unsnapping pin lock (3) and removing
shackle bolt (4). Place lifting shackle (5) over chain (1 1) and reinstall shackle (5).
(2) On winches with level wind:
(a) Pull cable chain (15) up through
the space between the bumper and the
winch.
(b) Wind cable chain around level
wind frame and attach hook (1?) to the
frame.
(3) Clean snatch block and other
equipment used in winch operation and
stow in place. Refer to paragraph 2-7 for
general cleaning instructions.
TA 090196
2-89
Page 140
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-20. Operation of Cargo Trucks.
a. General. M923 through M926 cargo trucks have 7 by 14 foot (2.135 by 4.27 meter)
cargo beds. M927 and M928 cargo trucks have 7 by 20 foot (2.135 by 6.1 meter) beds.
All can be equipped with troopseat and paulin kits.
b. Lowering Tailgate.
WARNING
On dropside trucks, make certain
forward end of dropsides are
engaged before lowering tailgate.
(1) Remove hooks (1) from retainer
slots on both sides of tailgate.
(2) Grasp top of tailgate and pull it
back. Do not allow tailgate to drop.
i\ III IT
(3) On dropside trucks, turn locking
handles (3) on sides of tailgate counter
clockwise to loosen. Grasp ring (2) and
twist to turn T-bolt (4) vertically up.
Withdraw locking handle assembly. Do the
same operation on the opposite end of
tailgate.
(4) Grasp top of tailgate and pull it
back. Do not allow tailgate to drop.
c. Low ering and Raising Troopseats
(1) To lower troopseats, pul! troopseat supports (8) forward 45 degrees, release
latches (7) and lower seats.
(2) Adjust each troopseat support (8) to contact both the side and floor of the
truck.
(3) On dropside trucks, install troopseat locking rods (9) in hole (12) near tailgate.
Locking rod (9) can be shortened or lengthened. To adjust locking rod:
TA 090197
2-90
Page 141
TM 9-2320-272-10
(a) Loosen locknut (10).
(b) Turn threaded end (1 1) clockwise
to shorten, counterclockwise to lengthen.
(c) Tighten locknut (10).
(4) To raise troopseat, reverse
procedure just given.
d. Removing Front and Side Racks.
(1) Lower tailgate. Refer to b if necessary.
(2) Raise troopseats and secure in place with latches (7). Refer to c if necessary.
(3) On dropside trucks:
(a) Remove troopseat locking rods (9) from holes near tailgate. Install safety pin
(6) to secure locking rods (9) to side rack bracket (5).
(b) Pull back four troopseat securing
pins (13) from corners of truck bed.
—hli
1—i
r
I
TA 090198
2-91
Page 142
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Lift and remove front rack (2).
NOTE
This operation requires two crewmembers.
(5) Lift and remove side racks (1).
e. Installing Front and Side Racks.
(1) Reverse procedures (1) through (5)
in d.
(2) When installing front rack, be sure
front rack retainer clip (3) is inserted in side
rack rings (4).
/ Lowering and Raising Dropsides.
(I) Park vehicle where it can best be
loaded or unloaded. Turn ignition switch
and battery switch lever to OFF and apply
handbrake.
(2) Turn locking handle (7) counterclockwise to loosen. Grasp ring (8) and twist to
turn T-bolt (6) in vertical up position. Remove locking handle (7) and repeat operation
on opposite end of dropside.
WARNING
Make sure troopseat securing pins (5) are engaged before lowering
dropside.
NOTE
TA 090199
2-92
Page 143
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Make sure forward ends of dropsi
lowering tailgate.
(4) To load from both sides:
(a) Lower tailgate. Refer to b(2) if
necessary.
(b) Remove locking handles (7) on
right side. Lower right dropside (9). Repeat
operation on left dropside.
(5) To raise dropside:
(a) Raise dropside and install T-bolt
(6) at forward end. Place T-bolt in slot,
turn 90 degrees and hold in position with
ring (8). Turn locking handle (7) clockwise
to tighten.
(b) Raise opposite dropside and secure
it in position.
(6) Raise tailgate and install left rear
and right rear locking handles (7).
es are both secured before
TA 090200
2-93
Page 144
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-21 . Operation of Medium Wrecker.
a. General. The medium wrecker (M936) has a hydraulic crane and front and rear
winches. The truck's winch and towing capacities are adequate for recovering all
wheeled vehicles. The medium wrecker also removes and replaces engines, power packs,
and gun tubes.
b. Front Winch Operation.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-19 for
operating instructions.
(2) Install field chocks (4) for heavy
recovery operations or operations on
slippery terrain. To install chocks:
(a) Remove chocks (4) from storage
area at left rear of wrecker body.
(b) Insert chocks (4) in left and right
brackets (2) beneath the front bumper.
Insert bolt (1) through bracket (2) and yoke
(3) to secure chock in place.
(c) Dig two 12-inch (30.5 centimeter)
holes at spade-end of chocks. Insert ends
(5) in holes.
c. Rear Winch Operation.
(1) Position rear of wrecker in direct
line with load to be winched if possible.
(2) Engage parking brake (15) and
turn ignition switch lever (8) and battery
switch lever (7) to OFF.
TA 092332
2-94 Change 1
Page 145
TM 9-2320-272-10
(3) Check oil level in hydraulic oil
reservoir (19).
7 M\r%
(4):
(4) For heavy pulls, install field chocks
CAUTION
Before opening reservoir,
make sure the area around
reservoir cap is clean. Do not
allow dirt, dust, or rain to
enter reservoir.
Do not proceed with winch
operation if oil level is less
than halfway from end of
dipstick to full mark (18). Fill
as needed.
(a) Remove chocks (4) from storage
area at left rear of wrecker body.
(b) For direct pulls install chocks
facing the load in left and right chock
brackets (20) beneath rear bumperettes.
Insert bolt (1) through bracket (20) and
yoke (3) to secure each chock in place.
(c) For indirect pulls, install chocks (4)
in brackets (20) on left side of rear
bumperette for left side pulls or in brackets
on right side of bumperettes for right angle
pulls.
(d) Dig two 12-inch (30.5 centimeter) holes at spade end of chocks. Insert chock
ends in holes.
(5) Start engine.
(6) Pull out hand throttle control lever (6) and set engine speed at 900 revolutions
per minute as indicated by tachometer (9).
(7) Place transfer case shift lever (14) in neutral.
(8) Disengage parking brake (15) and place brake lock switch (12) in LOCK
position.
(9) Place transmission shift lever (13) in "1-3" (third) gear for heavy loads or in "1- I
5" (drive) for light loads. '
(10) Unlock safety latch (16) and pull transfer power takeoff lever (17) back to
ENGAGED position.
(11) Turn on floodlight control switch (10) if operation is at night and tactical
situation permits.
(12) Turn on amber warning light switch (11) if tactical situation permits.
TA 092333
Change 1 2-95
Page 146
TM 9-2320-272-10
(13) Release level wind (1) by pulling
out lock knob (2), rotating it 90 degrees
and releasing knob.
(14) Turn on floodlights (5) if
operation is at night and tactical situation
permits.
(15) Push torque control lever (7)
forward to HIGH.
NOTE
Torque control lever must be
engaged in HIGH or LOW
before directional control lever
(6) can be operated.
WARNING
Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not allow cable
to run through hands. Broken wires cause painful injuries.
(16) To unwind winch cable:
(a) Briefly push directional control
lever (6) forward to UNWIND until winch
cable hook and chain (3) are loosened from
rear bumperettes (4).
(b) Direct crewmember to free cable
hook and chain (3) from bumperettes (4).
(c) With crewmember maintaining manual tension on cable, push directional
control lever (6) forward to UNWIND. Pull throttle control lever (8) back to increase
drum turning speed and forward to decrease speed.
(d) After required length of cable has been unwound, return directional control
lever (6) to neutral.
TA 090203
2-96
Page 147
TM 9-2320-272-10
(17) To rig the load:
(a) Attach utility chain (10) to lifting
shackles (11) or pintle hook of load (12).
(b) If load is very heavy or deeply
mired, install snatch block (16) or
combination of snatch blocks to increase
winch pulling power. To rig a snatch block:
/. Unwind enough cable (14) to reach
the load and back to rear winch. Rig cable
hook and chain (3) to rear bumperette (4).
2. Turn snatch block hook (15) to the right. Lift up rear of snatch block and open
support link (13). Insert cable (14). Lift up rear of snatch block and lower and lock
support link (13) to hook (15). Return hook.
3. Rig snatch block hook (15) to load (12).
(18) Disengage the brakes, transmission, and transfer of vehicle being retrieved.
WARNING
Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch operation. A snapped
cable can cause serious injuries.
(19) To pull load:
(a) Keep torque control lever (7) forward in HIGH for light loads or pull lever (7)
back to LOW for heavy loads.
(b) Put cable tensioner switch (9) down to engage tensioner.
TA 090204
2-97
Page 148
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Do not operate winch at high speeds. Do not operate at erratic
speeds. High speed or erratic winding can result in a snapped
(c) Pull directional control lever (1)
back to WIND.
(d) Pull throttle control lever (3) back
to increase drum turning speed.
(20) To shift torque control lever (2)
from LOW to HIGH or HIGH to LOW:
(a) Push directional control lever (1)
forward to neutral (lock) position.
(b) Push throttle control lever (3) full
forward, to lowest engine speed.
(c) Shift torque control lever (2).
(d) pull directional control lever (1)
back to resume winding.
(e) Adjust throttle control lever (3) to
desired engine speed and resume winding.
(21) Move directional control lever (1) to neutral (lock) to stop winding.
(22) Briefly push directional control lever (1) forward to UNWIND position to
loosen cable lor unrigging.
used.
(23) Remove winch cable chain and hook (10) from load. Remove snatch blocks if
(24) Pull directional control lever (I) back to WIND. Release directional control
lever to stop WIND operation when cable chain (8) approaches guide rollers (12).
7
TA 090205
2-98
Page 149
TM 9-2320-272-10
(25) To prepare rear winch for travel:
(a) Manually push level wind (6) full to the right. Pull out drum lock knob (7),
rotate 90 degrees and release. If necessary, jiggle level wind (6) to assure lock plunger
engages.
(b) Place cable chain hook (10) up through right bumperette (9) and down through
left bumperette (11).
(c) Place hook (10) around chain (8) between bumperettes.
(d) Briefly pull directional control lever (1) back to WIND to remove cable chain
slack. Return lever (1) to neutral when cable is snug.
(26) Pull cable tensioner switch (4) up to disengage tensioner.
(27) Pull torque control lever (2) in
neutral.
(28) Turn off floodlights (5) if used.
(29) Pull transfer power takeoff
control lever (19) forward to
DISENGAGE, and lock in position.
(30) Put transmission shift lever (16) in
"N" (neutral) position.
(31) Turn off main floodlight switch
(17).
(32) Disengage brake lock switch (14)
and engage parking brake lever (18).
(33) Turn off amber warning light
switch (15) if used.
(34) If field chocks (13) were used:
(a) Make sure transfer shift lever (20)
is down to HIGH.
(b) Release parking brake lever (18).
(c) Place transmission shift lever (16)
in "1-5" (drive) to move vehicle ahead far
enough to free chocks (13).
(d) Stop vehicle and engage parking brake lever (18).
(e) Re/nove field chocks (13), clean as time permits and stow chocks in storage
area at left rear of wrecker body.
(35) Clean and stow any other equipment used, including slings, utility chains or
snatch blocks. Refer to paragraph 2-7 for general cleaning instructions.
TA 092334
Change 1 2-99
Page 150
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Crane Operation. The medium wrecker crane is capable of rotating 270 degrees.
The crane boom extends 18 feet (5.5 meters) and elevates to 45 degrees. Data plate (1)
above crane controls lists safe loads. Safe loads vary depending upon crane extension
and how crane operation is rigged. Maximum crane capacity is 20,000 pounds (9,080
kilograms) with three part line.
(I) Park wrecker on a level grade with hard surface if possible. Wrecker position
depends upon type of lifting operation such as rear lift, side lift, or lift and swing.
NOTE
Whenever possible, position
wrecker for a direct rear lift.
(2) Position outriggers (6). To position
outriggers:
(a) Remove pin holding L-shaped
retaining bolt (4) at corner of outrigger
frame tube (9) and remove bolt.
(b) Pull out outrigger (6) until frame
hits stop. Lower outrigger (6) to vertical
position.
(T)^_ , [^CRANECARACITY
2 RWTHOST UNE
(c) Direct crewmember to insert outrigger handle (8) stored in tool box into hole
of adjusting screw (5).
I
(d) With crewmember holding adjusting screw (5) in place, grasp outrigger base (7)
and turn counterclockwise until base (7) makes contact with ground.
(e) Turn adjusting screw (5) clockwise with outrigger handle (8) until base (7)
presses slightly against ground.
(f) Repeat procedure at other corners.
(3) Start engine.
(4) Pull out hand throttle control (11)
and set engine idle speed at 1,250
revolutions per minute as indicated by
tachometer (12).
(5) Place transfer case shift lever (17)
in neutral.
(6) Disengage parking brake lever (18)
and place brake lock switch (15) in LOCK
position.
(7) Place transmission shift lever (16)
in "1-5" (drive) position.
TA 092335
2-100 Change 1
Page 151
TM 9-2320-272-10
(8) Unlock safety latch (20) and pull
transfer power takeoff lever ( 1 9) back to
engaged position.
(II) Adjust telescoping shipper braces
(10) as necessary to provide anticipated lift
height. To adjust shipper braces:
(a) Remove T-shaped retainer pins (3) from shipper brace assemblies (10). ■
(b) Raise boom to required height by pulling boom control lever (2) toward
operator. Adjust height slightly so that holes in male and female sections of shipper
brace assembly (10) line up.
NOTE
If more height is needed than full length of shipper braces allow, use
boom jacks. Refer to d(15) below for installation of boom jacks.
(c) Reinsert T-shaped retainer pins (3) in lined up holes.
(d) Lower boom slightly to remove load from crane hydraulic system.
WARNING
Direct all personnel to stand clear of crane or load during crane
operation. A snapped cable, shifting, or swinging load can be
extremely dangerous.
CAUTION
Do not unwind cable after hook has reached load. Continued
unwinding may loosen crane cable.
TA 092336
Change 1 2-101
Page 152
TM 9-2320-272-10
(12) To lift load:
(a) Lower crane block (2) to load (4) by pushing hoist control lever (6) to DOWN
position (toward the boom). Return lever to neutral to stop lowering operation.
(h) Rig load with utility chains, cable slings, or attach hook (3) directly to lilting
devices on the load.
(c) Raise load by pulling hoist control lever (6) back to UP position. Stop raising
operation by returning lever (6) to neutral position.
(13) To lower load:
(a) Push hoist control lever (6) forward to DOWN position. Return lever (6) to
neutral when load is lowered.
BOOM HOIST crowt SWING
DOWN
1
DOWN EXTEND
t
IffT
1UP
tUP RETRACT RIGHT
Do not allow crane block (2) to jam boom sheaves (1) in raising
operation.
(b) Block load to prevent tipping or
shifting.
(14) To lift and swing load:
(a) Perform steps d(l) through d(10).
(b) Slightly pull boom control lever (5)
back to UP position to take boom weight
off shipper braces (1 1).
(c) Remove L-shaped retainer pin (10)
from shipper braces (11).
(d) Swing brace assemblies (11)
upward to brace retaining brackets (9) on
each side of shipper. Secure braces (11) on
brackets (9) with clips attached to brackets.
JUl
TA 090209
2-102
Page 153
TM 9 2320-272-10
CAUTION
When extending boom, move
HOIST and CROWD levers
together.
(e) Extend boom (12) as necessary by
pushing crowd control lever (7) forward to
EXTEND position and hoist control lever
(6) forward to DOWN position. Maintain
an even distance between crane block (14)
and boom sheaves (13).
(f) Elevate boom (12) to desired height
by pulling boom control lever (5) back to
UP position.
(g) Raise load (4) as described in d(l2)
on page 2-102.
WARNING
Swing load slowly. A swinging
load can be extremely dangerous.
(h) Push swing control lever (8) forward to swing load to the left (LEFT position).
Pull swing control lever (8) back to swing load to the right (RIGHT position).
(i) Lower load as described in d(13).
(15) For heavy rear lift:
(a) Position wrecker on level, hard surface if possible.
(b) Position forward outriggers (15) located behind vehicle cab. Refer to cl(2) for
outrigger positioning instructions if necessary.
(c) Remove L-shaped retainer pin (10) from shipper braces (1 1).
(d) Swing shipper braces (11) upward
to brace retaining brackets (9) on each side 11
of shipper. Secure shipper braces (11) on
brackets (9) with clips attached to brackets. -
(e) Perform steps d(3) through d(9).
(f) Push boom control lever (5)
forward to DOWN to lower boom (12) to
horizontal position.
TA 090210
2-103
Page 154
TM 9-2320-272-10
CAUTION
When extending boom, move
HOIST and CROWD levers
together.
(g) Extend boom (5) to desired
operational length by pushing crowd
control lever (3) forward to EXTEND
position and hoist control lever (2) forward
to DOWN position. Maintain even distance
between crane block (7) and boom sheaves
(6).
(h) Remove boom jacks (8) from storage on right wrecker bed.
(i) Remove jack pin (13) from left rear stowage compartment. Remove both
retaining pins (9). Insert jack pin (13) in hole at boom 12-foot (3.66 meter) mark (14).
(/) Insert boom jack yoke end (10) on jack pin (13). Secure with retaining pin (9).
(k) Remove ring-handled pin (12) and telescope boom jacks (8) to required length.
Reinsert ring handled pin (12) when required length is obtained. Secure with retaining
pin (9).
(I) Repeat procedures (/J and (k)on opposite side of boom with second boom jack (8).
TA 090211
2-104
Page 155
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Direct all personnel to stand clear of crane.
(m) Pull boom control lever (1) back to UP position until boom jacks (8) are
raised off the ground.
(n) Remove boom jack base plates (4) located on each side of rear winch.
(o) Install boom jack (8) in base plate (4) and secure in place with pin (18) and
retaining pin (19).
(p) Install tie bar (16) between boom jacks (8) and secure in place with pin (15)
and retaining pin (17).
(q) Carefully push boom control lever (1) forward to DOWN position. Return
lever to neutral (stop) when boom jacks (8) make firm contact with ground.
(r) Proceed with lifting and lowering operation as described in d(I2) and d(13).
(16) Heavy side lifts are similar to heavy rear lifts except:
(a) Outriggers (20) on left side of
vehicle are positioned for heavy lifting from
left side of wrecker.
(b) Outriggers (20) on right side of
vehicle are positioned for heavy lifting from
right side of wrecker.
TA 092337
Change 1 2-105
Page 156
TM 9-2320-272-10
e. Towing with Wrecker Crane. Organizational maintenance personnel must
accompany operator when retrieving vehicle with an automatic transmission. Operator
must not attempt to tow such vehicles until driveline of towed vehicle is disconnected
by organizational maintenance.
CAUTION
Do not use towing as a means to start engine of vehicle with
automatic transmission. Towing to start engines is an emergency
procedure used only on disabled vehicles with standard
transmissions. Damage to automatic transmission of disabled
vehicle will result from towing unless drive shaft is disconnected.
(1) Position rear of wrecker directly in front of disabled vehicle.
(2) If tires, transmission, and steering of disabled vehicles arc serviceable, install
towbar to front bumper shackle brackets (4) as presented in step (4).
(3) If disabled vehicle has no shackle brackets (4) or if tires, transmission, and/or
steering of disabled vehicle are unserviceable, use lift-tow procedures presented in
step (5).
-
(4) To tow direct using front bumper
shackle brackets of disabled vehicle:
(a) Remove both lifting shackles (3)
from front bumper of disabled vehicle and
store in a safe place.
(h) Install clevis end of towbar (2) to
front bumper shackle brackets (4) and
secure in place with clevis bolt (5) and
safety pin (1).
(c) Install yoke end of towbar to
wrecker pintle hook (7).
(d) Loosely install a utility chain (6) around disabled vehicle's front bumper and
bumperettes of wrecker.
(e) Disengage brakes and place transmission and transfer of disabled vehicle in
neutral.
CAUTION
If disabled vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission,
organizational maintenance must disconnect drive shaft before
towing. Damage to automatic transmission of disabled vehicle will
result from towing unless drive shaft is disconnected.
TA 092338
2-106 Change 1
Page 157
TM 9-2320-272-10
(f) Reverse procedures (a) through (e) above after completion of towing operation.
(5) For lift-tow operations:
(a) Attach whiffletree (9) to lifting
shackles (3) of disabled vehicle.
(b) Lower crane block and hook (8)
and insert hook through center hole of
whiffletree (9). See d. Crane Operation.
(c) Remove towbar adjustment pins
(14) and slide out leg extensions (13).
(d) Attach clamps (12) to each leg
extension (13) and secure in place with
linking pin (16) and attached safety pin
(17).
(e) Loosen tension adjusting nut (11)
atop each clamp (12).
(f) Position clamp (12) against front axle (18) of disabled vehicle and wrap clamp
chain (10) around axle and back up through clamp. Lock in place by turning tension
adjusting nut (11) with wrench until securely tightened.
(g) Repeat step (f) above with second clamp in position against axle (18) on
opposite side of forward differential.
(h) After both clamps (12) are tightly secured to disabled vehicle, slide leg
extensions (13) back into towbar and secure in place with adjustment pins (14) and
retaining pins (15).
NOTE
If necessary, adjust length of tow bar while performing step (h) above.
Yoke end of towbar should extend one foot or more beyond front
bumper of disabled vehicle.
(i) Install yoke end of towbar to wrecker pintle hook (7).
(j) Disengage brakes and place transmission and transfer of disabled vehicle in
neUtral ~ CAUTION
If disabled vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission,
organizational maintenance must disconnect drive shaft before
towing. Damage to automatic transmission of disabled vehicle will
result from towing unless drive shaft is disconnected.
(k) Raise crane block and lift disabled vehicle front wheels off ground until towbar
is level (parallel to ground).
(I) Reverse procedures (a) through (k) above after completion of towing operation.
TA 092339
Change 1 2-107
Page 158
TM 9-2320-272-10
/.' Securing Crane After Operation.
(1) Stow and secure outriggers (5).
boom jacks (4). tie bar (7). and boom jack
base plates (6) as applicable. Refer to
paragraph 2-2 1 d.
(2) Fully retract boom (2) into shipper
(3) and center boom to rear of wrecker.
NOTE
When retracting boom, pull
crowd control lever (20) back to
RETRACT position and HOIST
control lever (19) to UP position
to prevent block (8) from
becoming tangled.
(3) Remove retainer pin (9) from
upper retaining bracket (10) and swing
snipper brace (13) down to retaining
bracket (12) on wrecker body. Secure
shipper brace (13) in place with L-shaped
retaining pin (11).
(4) Slightly push boom control lever
(18) forward to DOWN position to allow
shipper braces (13) to support boom and
shipper weight.
(5) Install lifting sling (16) onto boom hook (15). Attach hook ends of sling (16) to
brackets (17) on outrigger frame tube.
(6) Pull hoist control lever (19) back to UP position to remove all slack from
lifting sling (16).
TA 090215
2-108
Page 159
TM 9-2320-272-10
(7) Turn off floodlights (14) if used
during crane operation.
(8) Move transfer power takeoff
control lever (23) forward to DISENGAGE
position.
(9) Push in hand throttle control (25).
(10) Place transmission shift lever (21)
in "N" (neutral) position.
(11) Disengage brake lock switch (28)
and engage parking brake lever (22).
(12) Disengage amber warning light
(27) and floodlight control switch (26) if
used during crane operation.
(13) Place transfer shift lever (24) to
desired operating position.
26
TA 092340
Change 1 2-109
Page 160
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-22. Operation of Dump Trucks.
a. Payload Capacities. M929 and M930 dump trucks can carry 10,000 pounds (4,540
kilograms) of material cross country and 20,000 pounds (9,080 kilograms) over paved
roads. Table 2-3 lists typical material weights.
Table 2-3. Typical Material Weights.
Capacity level Capacity heaping
full 5.0 cu-yd full 7.5 cu-yd
MATERIAL WEIGHT or 135 cu-ft or 202.5 cu-ft
Per cu-ft lb Per cu-yd lb lb (approx) lb (approx)
Ashes, soft coal 43 1,161 5,805 8,708
Cinders 46 1,242 6,210 9,315
Clay, dry loose 77 2,079 * 10,395 * 15,593
Clay, wet l 10 2,970 * 14.850 122,270
Clay and gravel, dry 1 00 2,700 * 13,500 +20,250
Clay and gravel, wet 65 1,755 8,774 * 13, 163
Coal, anthracite (hard) 54 1,458 7,290 * 10,935
Coal, bituminous (soft) 81 2,187 * 10,935 * 16,403
Coke 28 756 3,780 5,670
Concrete 138 3,726 * 18,630 +27,945
Concrete mix, wet 124 3,618 * 18,090 +27,135
Earth, dry loose 75 2,015 •10,125 •15,188
Earth, moist packed 95 2,565 *12,825 * 19,238
Earth and gravel, dry loose 100 2,700 * 13,500 120,250
Garbage, dry 37 999 4,995 7,493
Garbage, wet 47 1,269 6,345 9,518
Gravel 1 10 2,970 *14,850 +22,275
Gravel and sand, dry loose 95 2,565 * 12,825 * 19,238
Gravel and sand, wet 120 3,240 * 16,200 +24,300
Limestone, crushed 100 2,700 * 13,500 120,250
Mud, wet 120 3,240 * 16,200 +24,300
Rock and stone, crushed 95 2,565 *12,825 * 19,238
Salt, fine 50 1,350 6,750 * 10, 125
Sand, dry loose 98 2,646 * 13,230 * 19,845
Sand, dry packed 110 2,970 * 14,850 +22,275
Sand, moist loose 120 3,240 * 16,200 +24,300
Slag, crushed 75 2,025 *10,125 * 1 5, 1 88
Snow, moist packed 50 1,350 6,750 •10,125
Stone, crushed 100 2,700 * 13,500 +20,250
Stones, loose 95 2,565 * 12,825 * 19,238
♦Over rated cross-country payload. tOver rated cross-country and highway payload.
WARNING
Stay clear of dump body and cab protector at all times during
loading and unloading operations. Dump body can unexpectedly
raise when overloaded or when a heavy load is dropped into
dump body. This can result in serious injury. .
TA 090217
2-110
Page 161
TM 9-2320-272-10
b. Regular Dump Operation.
(1) Position truck for dumping. Stop
| truck. Engage parking brake lever (4). Place
transmission shift lever (1) in "N" (neutral)
position.
(2) Check tailgate chains (8) to make
sure chains will not restrict opening of
tailgate (9).
(3) Unlock tailgate (9) by pulling rod
(7) toward front of truck.
(4) Put transfer shift lever (3) down
into HIGH position.
(5) With brakes still engaged, place
transmission shift lever (1) in "1-5" (drive)
position.
(6) Pull transmission power takeoff
lever (2) back to ENGAGE position.
(7) Return transmission shift lever (1)
to "N" (neutral) position.
(8) Release lock (6) and pull dump
body control lever (5)back to RAISE
position (5c) to raise dump body.
NOTE
Dump body will stop automatical
ly when it is fully raised.
(9) To lower dump body, push dump body control lever (5) full forward to
LOWER position (5a).
(10) Return lever (5) to neutral position (5b) when dump body is completely
lowered. Secure lever with control lever lock (6).
CAUTION
It is very important that dump body control lever (5) remain locked in
neutral position (5b) when hoist is not being operated.
(11) Push transmission power takeoff control lever (2) forward to DISENGAGE
position.
(12) Push tailgate control rod hand lever (7) toward rear as far as it will go to lock
tailgate in closed position.TA 092341
Change 1 2-111
Page 162
TM 9-2320-272-10
I
c. Rocker Type Dump Operation.
(1) Position truck for dumping. Stop truck. Engage parking brake lever (3). Place
transmission shift lever (1) in "N" (neutral) position.
(2) Remove bracket pin (8) from upper hinged bracket (7) on left side of truck.
(3) Unfasten hook (6) and swing left tailgate wing (9) full to the rear.
(4) Reinsert left bracket pin (8) in
upper hinged bracket (7).
(5) Remove right bracket pin (11) from
upper hinged bracket (10) on right side of
truck.
(6) Unfasten retaining hooks (6) and
swing tailgate wings (9) and (12) full to the
rear.
NOTE
Do not reinsert right bracket pin
(11).
(7) Remove left bracket pin (8).
(8) Reinsert left and right bracket pins
(8) and (11) after tailgate has been lowered
into position.
(9) Perform steps b(4) through b(ll) on preceding page to raise and lower dump
body.
(10) After dump operation, remove
bracket pin (8) and raise tailgate ( 1 3).
Swing tailgate wings (9) and (12) to the side
and reinsert bracket pins (8) and (11).
(11) Secure tailgate wings (9) and (12)
to side of dump body with retaining hooks
(6).
TA 092342
2-112 Change 1
Page 163
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Spreader Type Dump Operation.
(1) Position truck for spreading. Stop
truck. Apply parking brake lever (3). Place
transmission (1) in "N" (neutral) position.
(2) Thread tailgate chain (14) through
chain brace (16) at corner of tailgate (15).
(3) Unfasten hook (17) from tailgate
wing (20) and swing wing (20) out of the
way of corner brace (18).
(4) Loop chain (14) under tailgate and
stuff chain end into corner brace (18).
When only needed length remains, insert
chain link into slot (19).
(5) Return tailgate wing (20) to side of
dump body and secure with retaining hook
(17).
(6) Repeat procedures on opposite side
of tailgate.
(7) Perform steps b(3) through b(7).
(8) Release lock (5) and pull dump
body control lever (4) back to RAISE
position (4b). When body has raised 2 or 3
feet (.6 to .9 meters), move dump control
lever (4) back to neutral position (4a) to
lock dump body in position.
(9) Pull transfer shift lever (2) up to
LOW position.
(10) Depress foot brake and disengage
parking brake lever (3).
(11) Place transmission shift lever (1)
in "1" (first gear) position.
(12) Disengage foot brake and
accelerate.
CAUTION
Do not exceed five miles per hour (8 kilometers) in "1" (first gear)
position. If more speed is required, refer to caution data plate (21) for
correct transmission gear range
21
(13) Raise dump at intervals by
moving dump body control lever (4) to
RAISE position (4b) and then back to
neutral position (4a) as required.
9;CAUTI0N! DONOTEXCEED!^MAXIMUM ROAD SPEED IN MP.H
TRANSMISSION T%"
FIFTHFOURTHTHIRD
IL REVERSE 5*DONOT USE REVERSE INL£WTRANSFER
TA 090220
2-113
Page 164
TM 9-2320-272-10
(14) After material has been unloaded:
| (a) Stop truck. Engage parking brake lever (4).
(b) Place transmission shift lever (1) in "N" (neutral).
(c) Push transfer shift lever (3) down to HIGH position.
(d) Pull dump body control lever (5) forward to LOWER position (7).
(e) Return dump body control lever (5)
to neutral and secure lever in neutral with
lock (6).
(f) Push transmission power takeoff
control lever (2) forward to DISENGAGE
position.
(g) Push tailgate control rod hand
lever (8) up and back as far as it will go to
lock tailgate in closed position.
2-114 Change 1
Page 165
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-23. Operation of Tractor and Fifth Wheel.
a. General. A fifth wheel, or semitrailer coupler, is mounted on the rear of M931 and
M932 tractor trucks. When connected to a semitrailer, the fifth wheel pivots up. down
and sideways to allow for changes in the road. The fifth wheel is rated at 55,000' pounds
(24,970 kilograms) on the highway and 37,500 pounds (17,025 kilograms) cross country.
b. Wedge Adjustment.
(1) Position fifth wheel wedges (10)
fully beneath walking beam (9) for on-
highway operations.
(2) Position wedges (10) back and
away from walking beam (9) for off-the-
road operations.
(3) To position wedges:
(a) Loosen capscrews (11) in slot in the
center of each wedge.
(b) Slide wedge (10) into proper
position.
TA 092344
Change 1 2-115
Page 166
TM 9-2320-272-10
c. Coupling Semitrailer.
WARNING
Do not back up without a ground
guide.
(1) Back up tractor so fifth wheel
coupler jaws (9) are directly centered and in
line with semitrailer kingpin (3).
(2) Stop vehicle in front of semitrailer,
place transmission shift lever (6) in "N"
(neutral) position and engage parking brake
lever (7).
(3) Turn landing gear crank (4) to
adjust semitrailer height to tractor.
Semitrailer approach plates (2) should be
slightly lower than tractor fifth wheel (1).
(4) Block semitrailer wheels with
chocks (5) stored on underbody of
semitrailer.
(5) Pull plunger lever (8) up and out to
open fifth wheel coupling jaws (9).
NOTE
When backing up, maintain
centerline of tractor with
centerline of semitrailer.
TA 092345
2-116 Change 1
Page 167
TM 9-2320-272-10
(6) Disengage parking brake lever (7) and slowly back tractor under semitrailer.
Stop vehicle when semitrailer king pin (3) connects with fifth wheel coupling jaws (9).
Place transmission shift lever (6) in "N" (neutral) and engage parking brake lever (7).
(7) Connect tractor air coupling (10) to air couplings of semitrailer (11).
CAUTION
Do not cross air coupling hoses (12). Do not allow hoses (12) to
contact surface of tractor fifth wheel (1). Hoses may tangle if
crossed or become damaged during coupling operation if in
contact with fifth wheel surface.
NOTE
Airbrake hose shutoff cock levers (13) must be open at all times
during normal operation of tractor truck. Visually check each
shutoff cock lever (13) at base of airlines. Cock lever (13) should
be in the down (open) position (13b). Open cocks if lever (13) is
in the up (closed) position (13a).
TA 090224
2-117
Page 168
TM 9-2320-272-10
(8) Press in trailer air supply valve (3)
and hold in place for fifteen seconds.
Release valve (3). Valve should remain in
engaged position indicating semitrailer
airbrake system has proper air pressure.
WARNING
(9) Pull down trailer air brake hand
control (2) to engage semitrailer brakes.
| (10) Disengage tractor parking brake
lever (6), place transmission shift lever (5)
in "R" (reverse) position and resume
backing up.
(11) Stop vehicle when tractor
coupling jaws (7) close around semitrailer
kingpin (8). Visually check to make sure
jaws (7) have completely closed.
(12) With trailer airbrake control
handle (2) engaged, place transmission shift
lever (5) in "1" (first) gear position and
slightly depress accelerator pedal. Tractor
will not move forward if fifth wheel is
properly connected to semitrailer.
CAUTION
Stop vehicle immediately and
repeat steps c(9) through c(12) if
tractor moves forward.
Do not continue with coupling
operation if trailer air supply
valve (3) fails to engage.
Disconnect air couplings (9) and
notify organizational mainte
nance.
TA 092346
2-118 Change 1
Page 169
TM 9-2320-272-10
(13) Place transmission shift lever (5) in "N" (neutral) position and apply
handbrake (6).
(14) Connect electrical cable (11) to electric receptacle (10) on, semitrailer.
(15) Check semitrailer lights:
(a) Turn main switch (1) to STOP turn position or SERVICE drive.
(b) Operate turn signal switch (4) and direct ground guide to check for proper
operation of semitrailer stoplights.
(c) Depress brake pedal and direct ground guide to check for proper operation
of semitrailer stoplights.
(16) Turn crank (12) to raise landing
gear (14) on semitrailer.
(17) Stow landing gear tloat pads (15)
in racks (13) and remove wheel chocks (16).
d. Uncoupling Semitrailer.
WARNING
Use ground guide when backing
up to park semitrailer.
(I) Park semitrailer in proper location, engage semitrailer airbrake control lever (2)
and tractor parking brake lever (6).
(2) Place chock blocks (16) in front of
and behind semitrailer wheels.
(3) Place landing gear float pads (15)
on ground beneath semitrailer landing legs.
(4) Turn crank (12) until landing legs
(14) make firm contact with float pads (15).
TA 090226
2-1 19
Page 170
TM 9-2320-272-10
(5) Disconnect and remove electrical
cable (2) from semitrailer. Secure cable (2)
on tractor.
(6) Disconnect and remove air
couplings (1) from semitrailer. Secure
airhose and couplings on tractor.
vehicle cab will automatically pop
back and disengage when air
couplings (1) are disconnected.
(7) Pull plunger lever (5) up and out to open fifth wheel coupling jaws (4) This
will release semitrailer kingpin (6). 6J y h
(8) Move tractor forward until fifth wheel (8) and approach plate ramps (7) are
clear of semitrailer. F '
TA 092347
2-120 Change 1
Page 171
TM 9-2320-272-10
TA 092348
Change 1 2-121
Page 172
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-24. Operation of Expansible Van Trucks.
I a. General. Expansible van trucks transport communication equipment into the field.
Van bodies are 8 feet (2.4 meters) wide in travel position. In the field, van sides expand
to nearly 14 feet (4.3 meters).
b. Selecting Operating Site. Whenever possible, position van on level, firm ground.
WARNING
Block vehicle wheels if operating site is on a grade, no matter how slight.
c. Leveling Van Body.
(1) Remove four adjustable leveling
jacks (4) and foot pads (5) from stowage
compartment on rear of van body.
(2) Attach foot pad (5) to bottom of
each jack (4). Assemble and install inner
and outer tubes of jack and adjust jack
length to approximate height of brackets
(1) (marked H) at each corner of van.
Secure jack (4) with chained pin (7).
1(3) Insert upper foot (2) of jack (4) into bracket (1). Install jack handle (3) and
unscrew jack until foot pads (5) are in firm contact with ground. Anchor each jack foot
pad (5) with two jack spikes (6).
(4) Repeat procedure at each corner of van until body is level.
NOTE
Do not attempt to jack entire van clear of ground with levelingjacks.
d. Power Lift Gate Operation. Power lift gate on M935 models must be lowered
before van body can be expanded.
(1) Remove ladders (10) from lift gate:
(a) Remove eyebolts (11) securing ladders (10) to lift gate.
NOTE
This operation requires two crewmembers.
(b) Lift ladders (10) off of ladder hooks (9) and lower ladders.
(2) Prepare for power lift gate operation:
TA 092349
I
2-122 Change 1
Page 173
TM 9-2320-272-10
(a) Start engine.
(b) Pull out hand throttle control (17)
and set engine idle speed at 1,000 to 1,200
revolutions per minute as indicated by
tachometer (18).
(c) Place transfer case shift lever (16)
in neutral.
(d) Place transmission shift lever (14)
in "1-5" (drive) position.
(e) Pull transmission power takeoff
lever (15) back to ENGAGE position.
(h) To lower power lift gate (8),
remove lever extension from cab stowage
and install on lowering and elevating
control lever (13) at van rear. Move lever
(13) momentarily toward front of vehicle to
release safety lock, then toward rear of
vehicle. Lift gate will stop automatically at
ground level.
(3) Push transmission power takeoff
lever (15) forward to DISENGAGE
position
(4) Stop engine.
(f) Return transmission shift lever (14)
to "N" (neutral).
(g) To open power lift gate (8), move
opening and closing control lever (12) at
van rear toward rear of vehicle. Lift gate
will stop automatically when fully open.
TA 097350
Change 1 2-123
Page 174
TM 9-2320-272-10
I
e. Expanding Van Body.
(1) On M934 model vans without
power lift gate:
(a) Release toggle clamp (2) securing
right ladder (1).
NOTE
• This operation requires two
crewmembers.
Vans with power lift gate must
lower gate before expanding van
sides. Refer to d for lift gate
operating instructions.
(b) Lift ladder (1) up and out to remove
ladders from rear door ladder mounting racks.
(c) Install ladder (1) in brackets beneath
right rear door.
(2) Remove chain pin (8) from lock
handle assembly (9). Pull handle (9) out
and disengage handle end from retaining
bracket (7). Repeat procedure at all four
van corners.
(3) Remove side panel lock wrench (1 1)
and ratchet wrench '(5) from holders inside left
rear door.
(4) Turn four side locks (10) one quarter
turn counterclockwise with side panel lock
wrench (1 1).
I
(5) Push locking plunger (3) downward
to release ratchet (4).
2 ^ 1\i \j
■
\l *"
1/: ic
;—(fy—il V ' J ° * • •
TA 092351
2-124 Change 1
Page 175
TM 9-2320-272-10
(6) With ratchet wrench (5) turn left ratchet (4) counterclockwise to expand left
side panel (13). Turn right ratchet (6) clockwise to expand right side panel (14). Crank
both sides fully out.
(7) Unfold four end panels (15). Unclip and use holding rod (17) to keep end panel
door open and out of the way while roof (16) and floor panels (18) are being raised and
lowered.
WARNING
Do not open hinged roof (16)
and floor panel (18) from
outside the van. Push open roof
and floor panel from inside van
only.
(8) Turn hinged roof lock handle (12)
counterclockwise to release panel locks.
(9) From inside van, push hinged roof (16) and floor panel (18) outward. Step out
onto floor panel (18) and lift roof panel (16) until panels are fully open.
TA 090232
2-125
Page 176
TM 9-2320-272-10
(11) Slide end panel bolt (6) into
corner post guide (8).
(12) Crank both sides in with ratchet
wrench until toggle clamps (1) on van roof
can be attached to swivel hooks (2). Left
ratchet (13) is turned clockwise to retract
left side of van. Right ratchet (14) is turned
counterclockwise to retract right side of
van.
(13) Pull side panel (4) straight by
partially closing clamps (1). While doing
this, push up on hinged roof (3) and out on
end panels (5) to insure seal alinement.
(14) Tramp heavily on hinged floor
panel (7) to relieve any binding.
(15) Apply force to left and right
ratchet cranking mechanisms (13) and (14)
to insure a tight seal.
©9r
(16) Remove sidq lock rod (10) from
retaining clip. Swing rod (10) down and
engage end of rod (9) with lock handle
assembly (11). Push assembly closed and
secure with chained pin (12). Repeat
procedure at all four van corners.
(17) Close three toggle clamps (1) on
each side, closing center clamp first.
NOTE
Make sure sliding end panel bolts
(6) are fully extended into corner
post guides (8).
TA 090233
2-126
Page 177
TM 9-2320-272-10
(18) Complete van set-up as applicable:
(a) Mount ladders (18) to rear and/or side doors.
WARNING
Ground spike (20) must be driven into ground 18 to 24 inches (46
to 61 centimeters) and spike cable (25) connected to the chassis
(23) before power can be taken from outside source.
(b) Remove ground spike (20) from storage box (19).
WARNING
Make certain spike cable ring terminal (22) makes good contact with
bare metal. If necessary, scrape clean contact area of dirt, paint, or
rust.
(c) Remove bolt (21) and connect spike cable ring terminal (22) to chassis behind
left-rear stoplight (24).
(d) Drive ground spike (20) 18 to 24 inches (46 to 61 centimeters) into ground.
(e) Remove power cable (16) from power cable reel (17).
(f) Connect power cable (16) to appropriate auxiliary power source.
(g) Connect other end of power cable (16) to van power entrance receptacle (15).
TA 090234
2-127
Page 178
TM 9-2320-272-10
/ Operating Van Electrical System.
CAUTION
I
If auxiliary power source is an alternating electric current (AC), turn
on power converter switch (3) before opening main circuit breaker
switches (switches 22, 23, and 24).
(1) Turn on main switches (switches 22, 23, 24) to open switch box (1) to current
from outside power source.
(2) Turn on ceiling light switch (switch 14).
(3) Turn on receptacle switches (switches 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13).
(4) Turn on switch 5 if left heater (6) is to be used. Turn on switch 8 if right heater
(8) is to be used. Refer to g for left and right heater operating instructions.
(5) Turn on switches 16, 17, and 18 if air conditioning unit (7) is to be used. Refer
to h for air conditioner operating instructions.
(6) Turn on switch 2 if blackout switch (4) is to be used. Refer to j for blackout
operating instructions.
(?) Tur".°n_emergency light switch W if outside power source fails
TA 092352
2-128 Change 1
Page 179
TM 9-2320-272-10
g. Operating Van Heaters.
WARNING
Ground spike (10) must be
driven into ground 18 to 24
inches (46 to 61 centimeters) and
spike cable (11) connected to the
chassis (9) before electric power
can be taken from outside
source.
(I) Turn on main circuit breaker switches (switches 22, 23 and 24) in circuit
breaker switch box (1).
(2) Turn on left heater switch (switch 5) and/or right heater switch (switch 8) in
circuit breaker switch box (1).
(3) Set heater thermostat (2) to desired
temperature.
(4) Set heater switch (13) to HEAT
(for heated air) or FAN (for unheated air)
as desired. White indicator light (14) should
come on when heater is working properly.
(5) Set louver operating handles (12)
to control mix of outside air with
recirculated air.
(a) On left side heater, pull louver
handle (12) out to recirculate air, in to
admit outside air.
(b) On right side heater pull louver
handle (12) in to recirculate air, out to
admit outside air.
(6) Open heat registers (15) below
heaters.
(7) To stop heaters, turn off heater
control switch (13).
CAUTION
Do not turn off heater circuit
breaker switches (switches 5 and
8) until white indicator light (14)
goes off.
TA 090236
2-129
Page 180
TM 9-2320-272-10
h. Operating Van Air Conditioner.
(I) Push bonnet door control rod (12)
forward to open bonnet door (14).
WARNING
Ground spike (3) must be driven
into ground 18 to 24 inches (46
to 61 centimeters) and spike
cable (2) connected to chassis (1)
before power can be taken from
outside source.
(2) Turn on main circuit breaker
switches (switches 22, 23, and 24) in circuit
breaker switch box (4).
(3) Turn on air conditioner switches
(switches 16, 17. and 18) in circuit breaker
switch box (4).
(4) Turn on power input switch (6)
and compressor circuit breaker (7).
(5) Set air conditioner control knob (8)
to COOL for cold air or VENT for
ventillation of outside air into van.
TA 090237
2-130
Page 181
TM 9-2320-272-10
(7) Adjust temperature selector knob (10). Cooler temperatures are obtained when
temperature selector knob (10) is turned counterclockwise.
(8) Open air conditioner vents (1 1).
(9) To shut off air conditioner:
(a) Turn air conditioner control knob
(8) to VENT.
(b) Turn compressor circuit breaker (7)
to OFF.
(c) Turn power input switch (6) to
OFF.
(d) Turn off air conditioner switches
(switches 16, 17, and 18) in circuit breaker
switch box (4).
(e) Pull bonnet door control rod (12) back to close bonnet door (14).
i. Blackout Operations.
(I) Push up blackout panels (15) on
van sides and rear doors to block in all
interior light.
WARNING
Ground spike (3) must be driven
into ground 18 to 24 inches (46
to 61 centimeters) and spike
cable (2) connected to chassis (1)
before power can be taken from
outside source.
(2) Turn on blackout circuit switch (switch 2) in circuit breaker box (4).
(3) Turn on main circuit breaker switches (switches 22, 23. and 24) in circuit
breaker box (4).
(4) Turn on blackout switch (5). Ceiling lights (13) will now cutoff automatically
when van door is opened.
TA 090238
2-131
Page 182
TM 9-2320-272-10
(5) Turn overhead receptacle switches (4) to ON position.
NOTE
Leave switches (4) servicing machines that must operate without
interruption during blackout conditions in OFF positions. Lights
to operate these machines should be plugged into a separate
overhead receptacle with blackout switch in ON position.
(6) After blackout operation:
(a) Turn all overhead receptacle blackout switches to OFF.
(b) Turn off main blackout switch (5).
(c) Turn off blackout circuit breaker switch (switch 2) in circuit breaker box (2).
(I) Use inside van switch (8) to open-.te lift pate when vehicle is connected to an
external power source.
CAUTION
Do not use inside van switch when power takeoff is engaged.
(a) Upper button (7) elevates hydraulic lift.
(b) Lower button (6) lowers hydraulic lift.
(2) Use power lift gate operation procedures outlined in d when external power is
not available.
TA 090239
2-132
Page 183
TM 9-2320-272-10
CAUTION
• Do not elevate lift gate to closed position when rear doors are
open. Do not carry load on lift gate when vehicle is in motion.
• Do not overload lift gate. Distribute load evenly. Maximum
load is 3,000 pounds (136.2 kilograms).
k. Retracting Van Body.
(1) Turn off van machines.
(2) Remove and stow all gear and
equipment from expanded sections of van
floor.
(3) Close and secure all windows and
side doors.
(4) Turn off all switches (switches 1
through 24) in circuit breaker box (2).
(5) Turn off power convenor switch
(3) if used during operation.
(6) Retract four end sliding bolts (1).
®
(7) Release and unhook six toggle
clamps (9). Do not place swivel hooks (10)
in stowed position.
(8) Remove field telephone lead-in
(11).
(9) Remove power cable (12), rewind
on power cable reel (13), and cover with
canvas cover.
(10) Remove ground spike and cable
(15). Stow in storage box (14).
TA 090240
2-133
Page 184
TM 9-2320-272-10
(11) Disengage side lock rods (3) at all
four corners from lock handle assemblies
(5) and place rods (3) in retaining clips (4).
(12) Push locking plunger (1)
downward to release ratchet (2).
(13) With ratchet wrench (6) turn left
ratchet (2) counterclockwise to retract left
side panel. Turn right ratchet counter
clockwise to retract right side panel. Crank
both sides until fully retracted.
NOTE
When hinged roof panel (7) is
being lowered, hinged floor
panel (10) will swing up.
(16) Engage eye of each toggle clamp
(12) with anchor post (13) in stored
position and close clamp (12).
(14) Push up on hinged roof (7) to free
end panels (8). Push out on end panels (8)
and hold panels open and out of the way
with holding rod (9).
(15)- Push up on hinged roof (7) and
swing swivel hooks (14) into stored
position. Lower roof (7).
TA 092353
2-134 Change 1
Page 185
TM 9-2320-272-10
(17) From outside the van, push in to
fully close hinged floor and roof panels
(16). Turn lock handle (17) clockwise to
lock floor and roof panels in closed
position.
(18) Remove holding rods (9) from
end panels (8) and reinsert each rod into
retaining clips on beam.
(19) Close end panels (8) at all corners.
(20) Crank side panels (15) to fully
closed position by turning left ratchet (2)
clockwise and right ratchet (6)
counterclockwise.
(22) Insert end of lock handle
assembly (22) into lock rod brace (20).
Close lock handle assembly (22) and secure
in place with chain pin (21).
(21) Turn four side locks (18) one
quarter turn clockwise with side panel lock
wrench (19).
(23) Remove stabilizer eye bolt (11)
and slide telescoped parts upward into main
stabilizer tube. Reinsert eyebolt (11).
(24) Swing hinged stabilizer (24)
upward and secure beneath van body with
retaining screw (23).
(25) Repeat procedures (23) and (24)
with remaining van stabilizers.
TA 090242
2-135
Page 186
TM 9-2320-272-10
(26) Stow all tools and equipment used
during van operation.
(27) Close and secure rear doors.
(28) On models without lift gate,
install ladders (1) to rear doors and secure
for travel with toggle clamps (2).
(29) On models with lift gate, elevate
and close lift gate (3), then install ladders
(1). If necessary, refer to t/for lift gate
operating instructions using exterior
controls (5).
(30) Secure lower end of ladders (1) to
lift gate (3) with bolts (4).
2-136
Page 187
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-25. Operation of Auxiliary Equipment (Special Purpose Kits).
a. General. Special purpose kits for M939 series vehicles are listed in table 2-4.
Table 2-4. M939 Series Special Purpose Kits.
KITSM9M
M9292 M929 M926
M9M
M928 M929 M990 M991
M9M
M9992
M9M
M996
A-frame X X X X X
Airbrake Kit X X X X X X X X X
Arctic Winterization* X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Arctic Cargo Body X X X X X X
Bow and Tarp X X X X X X X X
Electric Brake Kit X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Deep Water Fording X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Machine Gun Mount X X X X X X X X X
Rifle Mount X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Troopseat & Paulin X X
Chemical Agent Alarm X X X X X X X X X X X X X
* Winterization kit includes engine coolant heater, personnel heater, hardtop closure and
thermal barriers.
b. Operating Instructions. Operating instructions for the following special purpose
kits are covered herein.
(1) Deep Water Fording Kit
(2) Troopseat Kit
(3) Bow and Tarp Kit
(4) Arctic Winterization Kit
(5) A-frame Kit
(6) Electric Brake Kit
(7) Airbrake Control Kit
TA 090244
2-137
Page 188
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-26. Deep Water Fording Kit.
I
I
a. General. The deep water fording kit allows M939 series vehicles to cross through
water up to 78 inches (198 centimeters) deep.
CAUTION
Never attempt deep water fording unless water depth is known to
be 78 inches (198 centimeters) or less, and bottom surface is
known to be hard.
b. Operator Preparation for Fording.
(1) Tighten fuel tank cap (3).
(2) Secure all loose objects on vehicle.
(3) Remove flywheel housing drain plug (2) from storage boss. Install plug (2) in
flywheel drain port (1).
TA 092354
2-138
Change 1
Page 189
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Make sure battery caps (4) are all
present and tight. Make sure transmission
dipstick (5) is secured tightly.
c. Fording Operation.
(1) Start Vehicle. Make sure engine is
running properly. Refer to paragraph 2-1 1,
k and / for proper starting and engine
operating instructions.
(2) Pull transfer shift lever (7) up to
LOW position and place transmission shift
lever (6) in "1" (first) gear.
WARNING
Do not attempt to cross water
deeper than 78 inches (198
centimeters). Limit vehicle speed
while fording to 3 or 4 miles per
hour (4.8 to 6.4 kilometers per
hour).
(3) Enter water slowly. Pull out
fording control handle (8) immediately
upon entering water.
(4) Maintain even vehicle speed while
fording, and exit water in area with gentle
slope.
(5) Push in fording control handle (8)
immediately upon leaving water.
Change 1 2-139
Page 190
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Do not rely on service brakes until they dry out. Keep applying
brakes until uneven braking ceases.
d. After Fording Operation.
(I) Remove flywheel housing drain
plug (3) from drain port (1). Install plug (3)
in storage boss (2).
NOTE
Vehicles completing a deep water fording operation must be serviced
by organizational maintenance as soon as possible.
TA 090247
2-140
Page 191
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-27. Troopseat Kit.
a. General. Troop seat kit is used to convert M929 and M930 dump trucks into
troop carriers. Troop seat kit also enables dump trucks to transport bulk cargo that
would otherwise extend above dump body.
b. Troopseat Kit Installation.
(I) Insert side racks (4) into slots (5) on dump body side walls.
(2) Fold out troopseat support legs (9). Lay troopseat (8) flat on bed of dump
body.
NOTE
This operation requires two crewmembers.
(3) Raise troopseat (8) level with slots (6) on dump body sides. Insert troopseat
engaging hooks (7) into slots, fold support legs (9) inward and lower troopseat into
position.
(4) Adjust each troopseat support leg
(9) until all supports evenly contact the side
and floor of the truck.
(5) Secure safety strap (11) to eyelets
(10) on side rack ends.
TA 090248
2-141
Page 192
TM 9-2320-272-10
I
(6) Install bows, end curtain, and tarpaulin top. Refer to following paragraph 2-28
for bow and tarp kit installation.
CAUTION
Troopseat kit for dump trucks must be removed and stowed off
vehicle when dump truck is used for dumping operations.
2-28. Bow and Tarp Kit.
a. Bow and Tarp Kit Installation.
(1) Insert staves (I) into side rack
sockets (4).
(2) Insert overhead cross bows (3) into
staves (I). Secure each end of overhead
cross bows (3) in place with stave latches
(2).
NOTE
Some overhead cross bows secure
in place with screws and washers
instead of latches.
(3) Thread two lashing ropes (7) into center eyelets of forward end curtain (9).
Place forward end curtain in position and wind ropes (7) alternately around overhead
bow (8) and through eyelets.
TA 092356
2-142 Change 1
Page 193
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Secure rope end on each side of vehicle to lashing hooks (10).
(5) Secure personnel safety strap (5) to eyelets (6) on side rails nearest tailgate.
(6) Repeat procedure with rear end curtain. Do not tie down bottom of rear end
curtain until bow and tarp installation is completed.
NOTE
Do not tie down bottom of rear end curtain when transporting troops.
TA 092357
Change 1 2-143
Page 194
TM 9-2320-272-10
(7) Install paulin top as follows:
(a) Place folded paulin (1) across top
center bow with half marked FRONT
facing front of truck.
(b) Unfold front of paulin (1) over
bows (2) all the way. Now unfold other end
of paulin top toward rear of truck.
(c) Unfold one side of paulin (1), then
unfold other side toward sides of truck.
Allow loose paulin sides to drape over side
of truck.
(d) Tighten lashing ropes (3) to lashing
hooks (4) on each side of truck.
NOTE
Ropes should be snug, but not too tight.
TA 090251
2-144I
Page 195
TM 9-2320-272-10
h. Raising Paulin for Ventilation.
NOTE
This operation requires two or
three erewmembers.
(1) Remove rear paulin end curtain
(5), if installed.
(2) Untie all paulin lashing ropes (3).
c. How and Tarp Kit Removal.
NOTE
Do not fold or stow paulin when
wet.
(1) Remove paulin top (I) from truck
and lay paulin flat on ground, with buckles
(9) on top.
(3) Fold up paulin (1) into three to
five folds until straps (6) attached to staves
are exposed.
(4) Fasten folded paulin in place using
straps (6) and buckles (7) attached to
outside of paulin.
(5) Tie front and rear lashing ropes to
end staves (8).
TA 090252
2-145
Page 196
TM 9-2320-272-10
(2) Fold eyelet side of paulin (1) to
first row of buckles.
(3) Fold paulin (1) over again, and
then one more time.
(4) Fold other side of paulin (1) once,
to the row of buckles.
(5) Then fold paulin (1) again, until
the two folds meet.
(6) Now fold the side with three folds
over the side with four folds.
(7) Next fold paulin (1) end halfway to
the first seam, and then over again, until
inner edge of paulin is at middle.
TA 090253
2-146
Page 197
TM 9-2320-272-10
(8) Repeat folding on opposite paulin
(1) end until both folded ends meet.
(9) Place folded paulin (I) front end
up and with chalk, mark FRONT. Make
sure that letters are big enough to see.
(10) Turn folded paulin (1) over and
mark REAR.
(11) Remove end curtains (2) and fold
them to approximately the same dimensions
as the paulin.
(12) Place paulin (I) and end curtains
(2) on a pallet for storage.
(13) Unlatch and remove overhead
cross bows (5) from staves.
(14) Remove staves (4) from side rack
sockets (3).
TA 090254
2-147
Page 198
TM 9-2320-272-10
(15) Stow staves (2) in pockets (3) on forward end of truck sides. On M923 and
M925 models, staves are stored in pockets on cargo body directly behind vehicle cab
(1).
TA 090256
2-148
Page 199
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-29. Arctic Winterization Kit.
a. General. Arctic winterization kits are installed by direct support maintenance
personnel on vehicles operating in -25° F to -65° F (-31°C to -53°C) temperatures or
less. The kit includes hardtop enclosure (5), quilted engine compartment cover (6), fuel
burning personnel heater and fuel burning engine coolant heater. Hardtop enclosure (5)
is also installed as a separate kit on vehicles operating in cold weather -25° F (-31°C)
and below.
b. Operating Engine Compartment
Covers.
(!) Start engine with radiator
winterfront cover flap (7) closed. Refer to
paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting
instruction.
(2) Roll up and secure radiator cover
flap (8) in open position when engine
temperature rises above 180°F(82°C) as
indicated by temperature gage (8) on
instrument panel.
(3) If engine temperature should
exceed 190°F (87°C). completely remove
engine compartment cover (6) to avoid
overheating.
(4) Open and close cover flap (7) as
required during arctic operations to
maintain engine temperature within normal
operating range of 165°F to 195°F (79°C
to 90°C).
TA 092358
Change 1 2-149
Page 200
TM 9-2320-272-10
c. Operating Fuel Burning Personnel Heater. Fuel burning personnel heater provides
heat and defrost to vehicle cab when the engine is operating.
(I) Shut off engine coolant heater if it is in operation. Refer to d(9) for engine
coolant heater shut down instructions.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine coolant heater control box (4) and
personnel heater control box (5) at the same time.
JJ IL
w
I
(2) Open electric fuel pump shutoff
valve by turning valve lever (10) one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
(3) Start vehicle engine. Refer to
paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting
instructions if necessary.
(4) Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button
(7) on personnel heater control box (5) to
check operation of circuit. Observe that
indicator lamp (7) lights up.
(5) Set HI-LO switch (6) on personnel
heater control box (5) to HI.
(6) Set RUN-OFF-START switch (8) to START position until indicator lamp (7)
glows. Switch (8) is spring loaded in START position and must be held down.
NOTE
Heater will not operate if switch (8) is moved to RUN position before
indicator lamp lights up.
TA 092359
2-150 Change 1
Page 201
TM 9-2320-272-10
(7) As soon as indicator lamp (7) lights, turn switch (8) from START position to
RUN position without hesitating at OFF.
NOTE
If heater fails to start, turn switch to OFF position and repeat
steps (5) and (I). Notify organizational maintenance if heater fails
to start after two attempts.
NOTE
Heater blower motor switch (1) on vehicle instrument panel is
not turned on. Blower motor switch (1) is replaced in arctic
winterization kit by HI-LO switch (6) and RUN-OFF-START
switch (8).
(8) Adjust hot air flow with heat vent control handle (3).
CAUTION
Heat cab before defrosting windshield. Glass damage may result
from sudden temperature changes.
(9) Adjust defroster control handle (2) as required to defrost windshield. All
heated air is directed at windshield when defroster control handle (2) is pulled all the
way out.
(10) To shut down personnel heater:
(a) Turn RUN-OFF-START switch (8) to OFF position.
(b) Remain in vehicle cab to make sure indicator lamp (7) goes out and blower
motor stops.
(c) Close defroster control handle (2) and heat vent control handle (3).
(d) Shut off vehicle engine. Refer to paragraph 2-14 for engine shut off
instructions if necessary.
(e) Close electric fuel pump shutoff valve (9) by turning valve lever (10) one-
quarter turn clockwise.
NOTE
Do not turn battery switch to OFF or close electric fuel pump shutoff
valve ( 1 0) if fuel burning engine coolant heater is to be operated while
vehicle engine is off.
TA 090259
2-151
Page 202
TM 9-2320-272-10
J. Operating Engine Coolant Heater. Engine heater is not designed for use while
vehicle engine is operating. This heater preheats engine coolant in preparation for
starting at extremely low temperatures or to maintain engine in standby readiness.
CAUTION
Coolant shutoff cocks (1) and (2) on engine coolant heater
should remain open at all times in arctic conditions.
WARNING
Exhaust gases can kill. Do not operate engine coolant heater in
closed area occupied hy personnel.
(1) Open heater fuel shutoff valve (3) by turning valve lever (4) one-quarter turn
counterclockwise. Heater (5) is located in tool box on right side of vehicle.
(2) Open electric fuel pump shutoff
valve located near air cleaner assembly (7)
by turning valve lever (6) one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
TA 092360
2-152 Change 1
Page 203
TM 9-2320-272-10
(3) Turn battery switch lever (8) to ON position.
(4) Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button (11) on engine heater control box (9) to
check operation of circuit. Observe that indicator lamp (11) lights up.
(5) Set Hl-LO switch (10) on engine heater control box to HI or LO position.
NOTE
Select HI position if engine is cold. Select LO position if engine
is already well heated. Switch (10) will automatically change to
LO position when coolant temperature exceeds 195°F (90°C).
Switch (10) will automatically change to HI position when
coolant temperature drops below 120°F (48°C).
(6) Set RUN-OFF-START switch (12) on engine heater control box (9) to
START position. HOLD in START position until indicator lamp glows. Switch (12) is
spring loaded in START position and must be held down.
NOTE
Heater will not operate if switch (12) is moved to RUN position
before indicator lamp lights up.
(7) As soon as indicator lamp (11) lights, turn switch (12) from START position
to RUN position without hesitating at OFF.
TA 090261
2-153
Page 204
TM 9-2320-272-10
NOTE
If engine coolant heater fails to start, turn switch to OFF
position and repeat steps (5) and (6). Notify organizational
maintenance if heater fails to start after two attempts.
(8) Check fuel gage (2). Make sure fuel tank(s) are full if engine coolant heater is
to operate for an extended period.
(9) To shut down engine coolant
heater:
(a) Turn RUN-OFF-START switch (4)
to OFF position.
(b) Remain in vehicle cab to make
sure indicator lamp (3) goes out and blower
motor shuts down (approximately 1-3
minutes).
(c) Turn battery switch lever (1) to
OFF position after indicator lamp (3) goes
out and blower motor stops.
ENGINE HEATER
2-154
Page 205
Oi-ZLZ-OZZZbWl
39S060VI
Apatideiuiuipndeut'tsOqotsiepiqeAfi(p)dun)c)sptcstimO
310N
-asi/VV^oo|OUrni.iounnb-auo)/')rOAO|OAp?vguiurniAqoA|BAyoinqspnfreiKheeso|j)a)
seiun\\v.\v,uopouibmreismu)9)s>pooyoinqs
iui?jooodepnqs-j||«suoiatJepoeiprnSuunQdepnqs-j^run
s>pooiiotnqstur|ooony'(/.)J3A9]e.qn.v|foinqspnjrbeudeinoo|
)6)>pooyotnqsiu»?|oooesop/q|niuedpcB01iouearee)|aL
Nounvo
SSl-2
Page 206
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-30. A-frame Kit.
a. General. The A-frame kit is installed on vehicles with front winches to provide a
means for lifting, moving, and lowering material when standard cranes are not
available. A-frame load capacity is 3,000 pounds (1,362 kilograms).
NOTE
A-frame kit is installed and rigged by organizational maintenance
personnel.
WARNING
Vehicle will become charged with electricity if A-frame contacts
or breaks high voltage wire. Do not leave vehicle while high
voltage line is in contact with A-frame or vehicle. Serious
personal injury can result. Signal nearby personnel to have
electrical power turned off.
(1) Maneuver vehicle into position for operation. Be careful that A-frame does not
come into contact with wires, cables, tree limbs or other overhead obstructions.
(2) Park vehicle and set handbrake.
e. Operating A-frame. Operate front winch to raise, lower or hold load. Refer to
paragraph 2-19 for front winch operating instructions.
CAUTION
• Do not attempt to lift more than 3,000 pounds ( 1362 kilograms)
with A-frame kit.
• Do not allow cable chain (2) to contact snatch block (1).
TA 090264
2-156
Page 207
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-31 . Electric Brake Kit.
a. General. Electric brake kit is attached to vehicles hauling trailers or artillery
equipped with electric brakes. Electric brake kit is installed by direct support
maintenance personnel.
(1) Connect trailer electric cable (5) to receptacle (6) above pintle hook (7).
(2) Set rheostat control handle (3). The exact setting for any given load must be
determined by experience.
CAUTION
Test your brakes for proper
setting before going on the open
road.
(3) To engage electric brakes of towed
load, depress vehicle service brakes.
TA 092361
Change 1 2-157
Page 208
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-32. Airbrake Control Kit.
a. General. Airbrake control kit is installed on vehicles hauling trailers or artillery
equipped with airbrakes. Airbrake kit is installed by direct support maintenance
personnel.
b. Airbrake Kit Operation.
(I) Insei* yoke (5) of trailer or artillery
load into pintle hook (2) of vehicle.
NOTE
Inserting yoke of trailer or
artillery piece requires two or
more crewmembers, depending
on size and weight of load.
(2) Connect airline(s) attached to load
to glad hands (3) of towing truck.
(3) Pull up handle (4) to open airbrake
hose line(s).
(4) Connect trailer brake light cable
(1) to electric receptacle above pintle hook.
(5) Start vehicle engine.
(6) Press in trailer air supply valve (7)
and hold in place for fifteen seconds.
Release valve (7). Valve should remain in
pressed-in position indicating trailer or
artillery airbrake system has proper air
pressure.
(7) Pull down trailer airbrake hand
control (6) to engage brakes of towed load.
NOTE
Airbrake control should be
engaged slowly to provide steady,
even braking.
TA 090266
2-158
Page 209
TM 9-2320-272-10
Section IV. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
2-33. Special Instructions.
a. General. Special instructions for operating and maintaining vehicles under unusual
conditions are included in this section. Unusual conditions are extreme temperatures,
humidity, and/or terrain. Special care in cleaning and lubrication must be taken in
order to keep vehicles operational when operating under unusual conditions.
b. Cleaning. Refer to paragraph 2-7 for cleaning instructions and precautions.
c. Lubrication.
(1) Refer to LO 9-2320-272-12 for proper lubricating instructions.
(2) Service intervals in LO 9-2320-272-12 are for normal operating conditions.
Reduce intervals to more frequent servicing when operating under unusual conditions.
d. Driving Instructions.
(1) FM 21-305 contains special driving instructions for operating wheeled vehicles.
(2) TM 21-300 contains instructions on driver selection, training, and supervision.
(3) FM 9-207 contains instructions on vehicle operation in extreme cold of 0°F to
-65°F (-17°C to -54°C) or below. Other documents with information on cold weather
vehicle operation are:
(a) FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual.
(b) FM 31-71 Northern Operations.
(c) FM 31-72 Mountain Operations.
e. Special Purpose Kits. Paragraphs describing special purpose kits for operation
under unusual conditions are:
(1) Arctic winterization kit, paragraph 2-29.
(2) Deep water fording kit, paragraph 2-26.
/ Reporting Materiel Failure. Report chronic failure of vehicle, body equipment, or
kits on DA form SF 368 (quality deficiency report — equipment improvement
recommendations) as prescribed by TM 38-750 and as stated in paragraph 1-2 of this
manual.
TA 092362
Change 1 2-159
Page 210
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-34. Operating in Extreme Cold.
a. General. The operator must always be alert to changes in weather. The operator
must take care of assigned vehicle in order to prevent damage to vehicle because of
sudden changes in weather. The operator should be cautious when starting or driving a
vehicle that has not been operated for a long period. Lubricants may thicken and cause
parts failure. Tires may freeze to the ground or may freeze flat on the bottom if under-
inflated. The operator should be alert to such possibilities in order to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
b. Before Operation.
(1) Perform all before operation services listed in table 2-2, preventive maintenance
checks and services.
(2) Place warm batteries in vehicle before starting engine coolant heater if vehicle
has been parked overnight without heat.
(3) Start engine coolant heater to warm vehicle coolant, engine, and batteries
before attempting to start engine. Refer to paragraph 2-29d for engine coolant heater
operating instructions.
c. Starting Engine.
(1) Start engine when engine coolant temperature reads 120°F (49°C) or higher as
indicated by temperature gage (2). Refer to paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting
instructions if necessary.
(2) After engine starts, warm up engine until temperature gage (2) reads
approximately 140°F(60°C).
CAUTION
Shut down engine coolant heater before starting vehicle engine.
CAUTION
Do not shut down engine if temperature gage reads less than
125°F (51.6°C). Run engine 800 to 1,000 revolutions per minute
as indicated by tachometer (1) until coolant temperature is at
least 125°F (51.6°C).
J U.
Q t° l\ °l
TA 090268
2-160
Page 211
TM 9-2320-272-10
(3) Check instrument readings. If any reading is not normal, stop engine. Report
condition(s) to organizational maintenance if operator troubleshooting cannot correct
malfunction. Normal instrument readings are:
(a) Oil pressure (6) should register 15 psi (103 kPa) with engine idling. I
(b) Air pressure (3) should register 120 psi (827 kPa).
(c) Battery indicator gage (4) should register in green area. I
(d) Coolant temperature gage (2) should register between 165°F to 195°F (74°C to
90°C).
(e) Transmission oil temperature gage (5) should register between 160°F to 220°F I
(71°C to 104°C). I
NOTE
If vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold before starting,
organizational maintenance personnel must warm gear cases,
wheel hubs and control linkage before operator places vehicle in
motion.
d. Driving Vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 5 miles per hour
(8 kilometers) when operating
vehicle in LOW transfer, first
gear.
(1) Drive slowly with transfer shift
lever (9) in LOW gear and transmission
shift lever (8) in "1" (first) gear for 100
yards (91 meters). This should be enough
time to warm up gear cases and tires.
(2) Constantly check instruments during engine operation. Oil pressure gage (6)
may show sudden drop because engine oil consumption will be higher in extreme cold
conditions.
CAUTION
If oil pressure does not register or drops to less than 38 psi (262 kPa)
when vehicle is in motion, stop engine immediately by pulling out
emergency fuel cut-off control (7).
e. Halting or Parking.
(1) Do not idle engine for more than 15 minutes.
(2) Park in a sheltered area out of the wind if possible. Park so vehicle does not
face into the wind if sheltered area is not available.
TA 092363
Change 1 2-161
Page 212
TM 9-2320-272-10
CAUTION
Operator must take every precaution to prevent snow from
blowing into vehicle engine when parked. Snow will melt and
later form ice to jam throttle controls.
(3) Park vehicle with wood planks, brush, mats, or canvas under the wheels if a
long shutdown period in open area is anticipated.
(5) Place chocks (2) behind vehicle wheels if parking on a grade no matter how
slight.
(6) Drain water from compressed air reservoirs (3) by turning four drain cocks
counterclockwise. Close drain cocks immediately after purging water. Drain cocks are
located near fuel tank on right side of vehicle.
TA 092364
2-162 Change 1
Page 213
TM 9-2320-272-10
(9) Perform after operation services in
table 2-2.
(10) Drain off any accumulated water
in fuel filter/water separator (5). To drain
water from fuel system:
(a) Open fuel line inlet petcock (6),
located near top of fuel filter/water
separator (5).
WARNING
Alcohol used in alcohol
evaporator is flammable,
poisonous, and explosive. Do
not smoke when adding fluid.
Do not drink fluid.
(7) Check fluid level in alcohol
evaporator (4) located on left side of
engine. Add alcohol as required.
(8) Start engine coolant heater if
required. Refer to paragraph 2-29^/ for
engine coolant heater operating
instructions.
CAUTION
Wait ten minutes after shutting
off vehicle engine before
draining fuel filter/water
separator. Ten minutes will
allow enough time for water to
settle in separator sump tank,
but is short enough time to
drain water before it freezes.
(b) Open petcock (7) at bottom of fuel
filter/water separator (5). Allow liquid to
drain off into a suitable container until fuel
is clear of water contamination.
(c) Close petcocks (7) and (6).
CAUTION
Clean away all snow or ice from
dispensing equipment and from
fuel tank filler cap(s) before
removing cap(s) to refuel
vehicle.
(11) At end of daily operations when engine coolant heater is not being operated,
notify organizational maintenance to determine if batteries must be removed.
NOTE
In extremely low temperatures, batteries of vehicles not using engine
coolant heater must be removed by organizational maintenance.
Batteries are then stored in a warm place.
TA 090271
2-163
Page 214
2-35. Operating in Snow.
a. General.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting instructions.
(2) If vehicle is equipped with arctic winterization kit. refer to paragraph 2-29 for
description and operating instructions.
(3) Operating on snow or on ice requires the use of tire chains on driving wheels.
Refer to FM 21-305 for installation of tire chains.
CAUTION
Attempting operation with only one driving wheel equipped with tire
chain may result in damage to tire and/or power train.
(4) Deflate tire pressure to 25 psi (172 kPa) if tire chains are not available.
Reinflate tires to normal operating pressures after emergency. Refer to table 1-7 or tire
inflation data plate on instrument panel for normal operating tire pressure.
b. Driving Vehicle.
(I) Remove chocks (1) from vehicle
wheels if used.
WARNING
Vehicle operation in snow is a
hazardous condition. Operators
must travel at reduced speeds
and be prepared to .meet sudden
changes in road conditions and
traffic speeds. Maintain safe
stopping distances.
(2) Place transmission selector lever (4)
in "1-5" (drive) and transfer shift lever (5)
in LOW. Place vehicle in motion slowly,
without causing wheels to spin or engine to
race. Place transfer shift lever (5) down to
HIGH gear ratio when vehicle is underway.
TA 092365
2-164 Change 1
Page 215
TM 9-2320-272-10
WARNING
Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on ice or snow. Sudden
stops will cause vehicle wheels to lock, engine to stall and loss of
steering.
(3) If rear end skidding occurs:
(a) Instantly turn steering wheel into direction of the skid.
(b) Let up on accelerator pedal (3) and apply brake pedal (2) in a.gradual,
pumping manner.
c. After Operation.
(1) Remove all ice and snow from underside of vehicle, aii cleaner intake and from
fuel tank(s).
(2) Refuel fuel tank(s) (6) as soon as possible.
(3) Open four petcocks (7) to drain
water from vehicle air reservoirs. Petcocks
(7) are located near fuel tank (6) on right
side of vehicle. Close petcocks immediately
after moisture is no longer being purged.
CAUTION
Wait ten minutes after shutting
off vehicle before draining fuel
filter/water separator (8). Ten
minutes will allow enough time
for water to settle in separator
sump tank, but is short enough
time to drain water before it
freezes.
(4) Drain water from fuel filter/water
separator (8):
(a) Open petcocks (9) and (10) at fuel
filter/water separator (8). Allow water, if
present, to drain off into a suitable
container. Close petcocks (9) and (10).
(b) If you can see large amounts of
water and/or impurities, allow fuel to drain
until fuel is clear.
CAUTION
If one quart or more of fuel must be drained before fuel is clear, fuel tanks
and fueling source should be inspected carefully. Report large amounts of
contamination to organizational maintenance.
(5) Perform after operation services in table 2-2.
(6) Check with organizational maintenance to determine if batteries are to be
removed or if engine coolant heater is to be put in operation.
TA 090273
2-165
Page 216
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-36. Operating in Extreme Heat.
a. General. Extreme heat exists when
outside temperatures reach 95° F (35° C) or
more. The effect of extreme heat on vehicle
engine is a decrease in engine efficiency.
Operators must adjust driving to conditions
when operating in extreme heat.
b. Before Operation.
(1) Perform before operation services
in table 2-2.
(2) Check for sand or insects in front
of radiator. Blow out all such obstructions
with compressed air.
(2) Frequently check air cleaner
indicator (2). If indicator shows red, park
vehicle, shut off engine, and notify
organizational maintenance.
c. Driving Vehicle.
(I) Avoid continuous vehicle operation
at high speeds. Avoid long, hard pulls on
steep grades with transfer shift lever (1) in
low gear. Drive slower in high altitude, hot
climate operations.
(3) Frequently check temperature gage (3). oil pressure gage (5), and transmission
oil temperature gage (4). Engine is overheating if one or more of the following
conditions exist:
(a) Engine coolant temperature is more than 210°F (99°C) as indicated by
temperature gage (3).
(b) Engine oil pressure drops below 38 psi (262 kPa) or 5 psi (34 kPa) with engine
at idle.
(c) Transmission oil temperature exceeds 300° F (149°C) as indicated by
transmission oil temperature gage (4).
(4) If engine overheating occurs:
CAUTION
Do not raise vehicle hood. Engine will cool faster at idle with hood
closed.
(a) Park vehicle, allowing engine to idle.
NOTE
Radiator fan and engine coolant will begin lowering engine
temperature a few minutes after vehicle stops.
TA 092366
2-166 Change 1
Page 217
TM 9-2320-272-10
CAUTION
If engine temperature continues to rise or does not show signs of
decreasing after two minutes of idling, radiator fan clutch motor
may be faulty. Refer to paragraph 3-16 for radiator fan clutch
emergency service.
(b) Observe temperature gage (3), transmission oil temperature gage (4), and
engine oil temperature gage (5), for indications that engine is steadily cooling.
(c) Shut off vehicle engine when engine temperature reaches normal operating
'temperatures 165°F to 195°F (74°C to 90° C) as indicated by temperature gage (3).
(d) Perform troubleshooting procedures as listed in table 3-1, after engine has
cooled to normal operating temperatures 165°F to 195°F (73.8°C to 90.5°C).
WARNING
Severe burns can result from opening surge tank filler cap (6) while
engine is running or before engine has cooled below 165°F (74°C) as
indicated by temperature gage (3).
(e) Place a thick cloth over surge tank
filler cap (6). Carefully turn cap (6)
counterclockwise to its first stop to allow
pressure to escape.
(f) Remove cap when cooling system
pressure is vented and check coolant level.
NOTE
Surge tank should be three-
quarters full.
(g) Start vehicle engine and add engine
coolant as required.
CAUTION
Do not add coolant when engine is hot, unless engine is running.
Add coolant slowly.
(4) Proceed with operation. Report any overheating to organizational maintenance
at completion of operation.
TA 092367
Change 1 2-167
Page 218
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Halting or Parking.
(1) Park vehicle under cover whenever possible to^ protect tires, canvas, paint,
wood, seals and batteries from sun, dust, and sand.
(2) Adjust tire inflation according to table 1-7.
NOTE
Allow tires to cool before checking tire pressure. Air pressures in
tires read higher when tires are hot.
(3) Check batteries daily and service as required when operating in extreme heat.
2-37. Operating in Dusty, Sandy Areas.
a. General. Vehicles operating in dusty or sandy areas require frequent servicing of
the air filter, cooling system, and lubrication points. Operators should be alert to engine
overheating.
b. Driving Vehicle.
(1) When starting in sand or soft
ground, pull transfer shift lever (2) up to
LOW position and transmission shift lever
(1) in "1-2" (second) or "1-3" (third) gear
position.
(2) Accelerate slowly so wheels will not
spin and dig into sand.
(3) Reduce tire inflation to 25 psi (172
kPa) to increase traction when operating in
deep sand.
(4) Reinflate tires to normal operating pressures after vehicle has cleared deep
sand.
CAUTION
Use a second vehicle with winch or tow to recover vehicles sunk
in deep sand. Do not attempt to jump vehicles out of deep sand
with quick transmission gear changes.
c. Halting or Parking.
(1) Park vehicle under cover whenever possible to protect tires, canvas, paint,
wood, seals, and batteries from sun, dust, and sand.
(2) At end of daily operation, use pressure air to remove all sand from vehicle
engine and areas around brakes and drum. See after operation services, table 2-2.
(3) If cover is not available, cover vehicle with paulins. When entire vehicle cannot
be covered, protect windows, cab, and engine compartment with paulins to prevent
entry of sand or dust.
TA 092368
2-168 Change 1
Page 219
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Use caution while refueling to prevent dust or sand from entering fuel tank.
Tighten filler cap securely after refueling.
2-38. Operating Under Rainy or Humid Conditions.
a. General.
(!) Material inactive for long periods in hot, humid weather can rust rapidly.
Fungus growth may develop in the fuel tank as well as on canvas paulin, seats and
other components. Frequent inspections, cleaning and lubrication are necessary to
maintain the readiness of vehicles in rainy or humid conditions.
(2) Fuel filter/water separator (3) must be drained frequently because of high
condensation in fuel system. To drain fuel filter/water separator (3):
(a) Open fuel line inlet petcock (4), located near top of
(b) Open petcock (5) at bottom of fuel
filter/water separator (3). Allow water, if
present, to drain off into a suitable —
container. 13
(c) If you can see large amounts of C$\
water and/or impurities, allow fuel to drain ^-^N
until fuel is clear.
(d) If little or no fuel passes out of the
filter, report clogging of fuel filter to
organizational maintenance.
(e) Close petcocks (4) and (5), before operating vehicle
CAUTION
If I quart (0.946 liters) or more of fuel must be drained before fuel is clear,
fuel tanks and fueling source should be inspected carefully. Report fuel
contamination to organizational maintenance.
b. Driving Vehicle.
(1) Do not spin wheels when placing vehicle in motion in heavy rain or muddy
conditions. If necessary, place transfer shift lever (2) in LOW gear to obtain a slow,
firm start.
WARNING
• Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on wet or
slipperv roads. Sudden stops will cause vehicle wheels to lock,
engine to stall and loss of steering.
• Do not operate vehicle on wet. smooth roads with lowered tire
inflation. Do not operate at too great a speed for road
conditions. Low tire inflation or excessive speeds may result in
loss of vehicle control on wet. smooth roads.
(2) Lower tire inflation to 25 psi (172 kPa) only when operating off-the-road in
heavy rain. Rcinflate tires immediately to correct pounds per square inch (kilopascals)
when operation changes to paved roads. Refer to table 1-7 for tire inflation data. Refer
to paragraph 3-14 for instructions on tire inflation using vehicle air system.
TA 090277
2-169
Page 220
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-39. Operating in Deep Mud.
a. General.
(1) Use tire chains in deep mud operations.
CAUTION
All driving wheels must be equipped with tire chains. Attempting to
operate vehicle in deep mud when only one driving wheel is equipped
with tire chain can result in serious damage to tire and/or power
train.
b. Driving Vehicle.
NOTE
Six wheel drive is achieved
automatically when transfer shift
lever (2) is placed in LOW. In
HIGH the front-wheel drive
switch (1) must be engaged to
achieve six wheel drive.
(1) Approach muddy terrain with
transfer shift lever (2) in LOW and
transmission shift lever (3) in "1-4" (fourth)
gear.
(2) Skidding and sudden loss of steering control are operating problems in mud. When
rear end skidding occurs, immediately turn wheels in direction of skid.
CAUTION
Use a second vehicle with winch to recover vehicles sunk in deep
mud. Do not spin wheels. Do not attempt to jump vehicle out of
deep mud with quick transmission gear changes.
c. After Operation.
(1) Wash all mud from vehicle as soon as possible, before it has time to dry and
harden.
(2) Remove tire chains from driving wheels.
(3) If vehicle front winch was used, clean and lubricate.
(4) At end of daily operation, perform after operation services as outlined in table
2-2.
TA 092369
2-170 Change 1
Page 221
TM 9-2320-272-10
2-40. Operating in Salt Water.
a. General. Salt water causes considerable damage to vehicle components. For this
reason, do not drive needlessly in or through salt water. Vehicle components that do
come in contact with salt water must be washed with fresh water as soon as possible.
Normally, all important vehicle components will ford salt water up to 30 inches (76
centimeters) in depth without fording kit and 78 inches (198 centimeters) with kit
installed.
b. Preparation for Fording.
(1) Make sure engine fuel tank cap(s), hydraulic oil filter cap(s), engine oil
dipstick, surge tank filler cap, power steering reservoir cap, transmission dipstick, oil
fill, and battery caps are secure.
(2) If fording is to be in more than 30 inches (76 centimeters) of water, a deep
water fording kit must be installed by direct support maintenance personnel.
(3) On all models, remove flywheel housing drain plug (6) from storage boss (5)
and install it in drain port (4).
c. Fording Operation in Salt Water.
(1) Place transmission shift lever (3) in
"1" (first) gear and transfer shift lever (2)
up to LOW position.
WARNING
Do not attempt to ford your
vehicle at depths greater than
78 inches ( 198 centimeters).
Limit speed to 3 or 4 miles per
hour (5 or 6 kilometers) while
fording.
TA 092370
Change 1 2-171
Page 222
TM 9-2320-272-10
(2) Enter water in area with a gentle
slope. Pull out fording control handle (4)
immediately upon entering water.
(3) Maintain an even vehicle speed.
(4) Push in fording control handle (4)
immediately upon leaving water.
d. After Fording Operation.
(1) Remove flywheel housing drain plug (3) from drain port (1) and install in
storage boss (2).
(2) Wash with fresh water all parts of vehicle which were in contact with salt
water as soon as practicable.
(3) Perform after operation services in table 2-2.
TA 092371
2-172 Change 1
Page 223
TM 9-2320-272-10
CHAPTER 3
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
3-1. Special Tools and Equipment. No special tools or test equipment are required
by the operator for maintenance of M939 series trucks.
13-2. Basic Issue Items. I Tools, equipment, and accessories issued with or prescribed
for use by the operator of M939 series trucks are listed in the basic issue items list in
appendix B of this manual.
3-3. Expendable Supplies and Materials. Supplies and materials required for
operation and maintenance of the equipment covered in this manual are listed in
appendix D.
Section II. LUBRICATION
13-4. Lubrication Order.l Lubrication order LO 9-2320-272-12 designates cleaning and
lubricating procedures for M939 series trucks. This document is issued with each truck
and is carried in vehicle at all times. A damaged or lost lubrication order should be
replaced immediately.
3-5. General Lubrication Instructions.
a. Service Intervals. Service intervals on the lubrication order are for normal
operation in moderate temperatures, humidity, and atmospheric conditions.
b. Application Points. Wipe clean lubricating fittings and surrounding surfaces
before and after applying lubricant.
c. Reports and Records.
(1) Maintain vehicle lubrication record on DA form 2408-1 in equipment daily log
book.
(2) Report unsatisfactory performance of lubricants or preserving materials on
maintenance request DA form SF368 as stated in paragraph 1-2.
3-6. General Lubricating Instructions Under Unusual Conditions.
a. Service Intervals. Increase frequency of lubricating service when operating under
abnormal conditions such as high or low temperatures, prolonged, high-speed driving,
or extended cross-country operations. Such operations can destroy lubricant's protective
qualities. More frequent lubricating service intervals are necessary to maintain vehicle
readiness when operating in abnormal conditions. During inactive periods, with
adequate preservation, service intervals can be extended.
TA 090281
3-1
Page 224
TM 9-2320-272-10
b. Changing Lubricant Grade. Lubricant grade used changes with weather
conditions. Refer to table 1-6 on pages 1-22 and 1-23 for lubricant grade changes for
the following temperature ranges:
(1) +90°F (+32°C) and above
(2) +32°F to +90° F (0°C to +32°C)
(3) +40° F to -10°F (+4°C to -23° C)
(4) 0°F to -65° F (-17°C to -54°C)
(5) Arctic conditions -25°F to -65° F (-32°C to -54°C)
c. Maintaining Lubricant Levels. Lubricant levels must be checked as specified in
LO 9-2320-272-12. Steps must be taken to replenish and maintain operating levels.
3-7. Lubrication for Continued Operation Below 0°F (-17°C). See FM 9-207,
Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather (0°F to -65° F) or
(-I7°C to -54°C).
Section III. TROUBLESHOOTING
3-8. Troubleshooting Procedures
a. Scope. The troubleshooting table contains instructions that will help the operator
identify and correct simple vehicle malfunctions during operations. The table also helps
the operator identify major mechanical difficulties that must be referred to organi
zational maintenance. The listing of possible malfunctions come under major vehicle
headings. They are:
• Engine
• Heating system
• Transmission
• Transfer
• Brake air system
• Wheels, tires, and hubs
• Steering
• Special body equipment
• Special purpose kits
Beneath these major headings are the symptoms and the corrective action.
NOTE
Operators should perform the corrective action in the order listed.
b. Omissions. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur. If a
malfunction occurs that is not listed in table 3-1, notify your supervisor.
TA 090282
3-2
Page 225
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Notify organizational maintenance personnel for corrective actions I
to be taken regarding malfunctions not listed in this table. ™
ENGINE
1. WHEN STARTER SWITCH IS TURNED TO START, ENGINE FAILS TO
CRANK OR CRANKS SLOWLY.
Step 1. Check to see if battery switch is off. I
Turn switch on.
Step 2. Check to see if transmission selector lever is in "N" (neutral) position.
If not. place in "N" (neutral) position.
Step 3. Visually check to see if battery cables are loose, broken, or corroded.
Visually check battery terminals and connections for looseness, damage,
and corrosion. Check battery for proper water level.
Notify organizational maintenance of any damage to batteries, cables and
terminals.
Step 4. Check log book to determine oil weight.
If necessary, have organizational maintenance drain and refill with correct
weight oil.
Step 5. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
2. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START.
NOTE
Do not completely fill fuel tank(s) before checking visually for leaks
in fuel system.
Step 1. Check to see if fuel gage indicates empty.
Fill fuel tank(s).
TA 092375
Change 1 3-3
Page 226
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Whenever fuel tank(s) are completely drained and then refilled, the
fuel system must be purged of air (para 3- 10?).
I Step 2. Check to see if emergency fuel cut-off handle on instrument panel is pulled
out.
Push in handle, exit vehicle, and raise hood. Manually reposition fuel cut
off valve located on left side of engine above fuel pump. Move valve from
cut-off position to operating position. Refer to paragraph 2-1 2j. Start
engine.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
3. ENGINE CRANKS BUT FAILS TO START AT OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES
BELOW 0°F (-17°C).
| Step 1. Check to see if fuel gage indicates empty
Step 2. Operate ether starting system.
Step 3. Check ether supply by removing ether bottle and shaking.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
4. ENGINE STARTS BUT MISFIRES, RUNS ROUGH, OR LACKS POWER.
| Step 1. Check to sec if fuel cut-off handle is partially pulled out.
If handle is partially out. push handle in and reposition fuel cut-off valve
(see malfunction no. 2).
Step 2. Check for air in fuel system.
Purge the fuel system of air (para 3-10?).
Step 3. Check fuel supply system for water and impurities.
Drain fuel filter into a container until fuel is clear (para 2-34, step 10). If
complete draining is required to obtain clear fuel, notify organizational
maintenance to check fuel tank(s) for contamination.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 092376
3-4 Change 1
Page 227
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
5. ENGINE OVERHEATS ACCORDING TO ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAGE.
Step I. Check coolant level in surge tank.
Add coolant to surge tank until at least 3/4 full. Check for leakage from
tank and hoses. If leaking, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 2. Check radiator core for obstructions.
If clogged, remove debris (cleaning instructions table 2-1).
Step 3. Check engine oil level.
If low, add oil. Refer to paragraph 3-10/? or LO 9-2320-272-12.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
6. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.
Step 1. Check engine oil level.
If low, add oil. Refer to paragraph 3-10/> or LO 9-2320-272-12.
Step 2. Check log book to determine oil weight.
If necessary, have organizational maintenance drain crankcase and refill
with correct weight oil.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
7. EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
8. EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION.
Step 1. Check for restricted air cleaner.
If restricted, clean air cleaner element (para 3-10/).
TA 090285
3-5
Page 228
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
9. EXCESSIVE EXHAUST SMOKE.
Step I. Check for restricted air cleaner.
If restricted, clean air cleaner element (para 3-10/).
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
HEATING SYSTEM
10. HOT WATER PERSONNEL HEATER FAILS TO PRODUCE HEAT AFTER
ENGINE REACHES OPERATING TEMPERATURE.
| Step 1. Check to see if blower motor switch is in OFF position.
Put blower motor switch in HI or LOW position.
Step 2. Check to see if coolant shutoff cocks are closed. Refer to paragraph 2-3.
Open coolant shutoff cocks.
Step 3. Check for air in heater.
With engine running, open air bleed petcock on engine side of heater and
allow air to escape (para 2-3). Close petcock.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
1 1 . HEATER BLOWER MOTOR OPERATES BUT HEAT FAILS TO REACH CAB
OR DEFROSTERS FAIL TO OPERATE.
Step l. Check to see if heat vent control and /or defroster control levers are
adjusted properly.
Adjust heat vent control or defroster control levers to direct heat flow to
desired location. Refer to paragraph 2-3.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 092377
3-6 Change 1
Page 229
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
TRANSMISSION
12. EXCESSIVE CREEP IN FIRST AND REVERSE RANGE.
Step 1. Hand throttle partially out.
Push hand throttle all the way in.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
13. TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING IN ALL RANGES.
Step 1. Check transmission oil level.
If low, add oil (para 3- 1 2).
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
14. NO RESPONSE TO SHIFT LEVER MOVEMENT.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
15. ROUGH SHIFTING.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
1 6 OIL THROWN FROM FILLER TUBE.
Step 1. Transmission oil dipstick loose.
Turn dipstick handle clockwise to tighten. Refer to paragraph 3-12.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 090287
3-7
Page 230
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
17. SLIPPAGE IN ALL FORWARD RANGES.
Step 1. Check transmission oil level.
If low, add oil (para 3-12).
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
18. VEHICLE MOVES IN NEUTRAL.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
19. LUBRICANT LEAKAGE.
Step 1. Check for loose hose and pipe connections.
Tighten all loose connections using crescent wrench.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TRANSFER
20. TRANSFER CASE LEVER WILL NOT SHIFT OR SLIPS OUT OF GEAR.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
21 LUBRICANT LEAKAGE.
Step 1. Check for loose drain plugs.
Tighten loose drain plugs using drain plug wrench along with crescent
wrench.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 090288
3-8
Page 231
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
EXCESSIVE NOISE.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
BRAKE AIR SYSTEM
INSUFFICIENT AIR PRESSURE AS SHOWN BY LOW AIR PRESSURE
WARNING BUZZER OR AIR PRESSURE GAGES.
Step 1. Check pressure buildup.
Allow time for pressure buildup. |
Step 2. Check to see if air reservoir drain cocks are open. g
Close drain cocks securely. Refer to paragraph 3-11.
Step 3. Check all air lines for loose connections.
Tighten all loose connections with crescent wrench.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
24. SERVICE BRAKES DO NOT APPLY.
Step 1. Check for open air reservoir drain cocks. I
Close drain cocks securely. Refer to paragraph 3-11.
Step 2. Check all air lines for loose connections.
Use crescent wrench to tighten all loose connections.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
25. UNEVEN BRAKING OR BRAKES DRAGGING.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 092378
22.
!
23.
Change 1 3-9
Page 232
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
26. PARKING BRAKE DOES NOT HOLD VEHICLE ON 45 DEGREE INCLINE.
Step 1. Check parking brake handle position.
If partially applied, pull parking brake handle all the way up.
Step 2. Check handle adjustment.
Turn knob on end of lever clockwise to increase braking action,
counterclockwise to decrease braking action.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
27. PARKING BRAKE DRAGS OR OVERHEATS.
Step 1. Check parking brake handle position.
If partially applied, release parking brake.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
WHEELS, TIRES, AND HUBS
28. WHEEL WOBBLES OR SHIMMIES.
Step 1. Check for loose wheel stud nuts.
Tighten loose wheel stud nuts using wheel stud nut wrench and handle.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
29. EXCESSIVE OR UNEVEN TIRE WEAR.
Step 1. Check air pressure in tires using tire inflation gage and hose assembly.
Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure. See table 1-7.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 090290
3-10
Page 233
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
30. VEHICLE WANDERS OR PULLS TO ONE SIDE ON LEVEL PAVEMENT.
Step 1. Check air pressure in tires using tire inflation gage and hose assembly.
Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure. See table 1-7.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
STEERING
31. HARD STEERING.
Step 1. Check air pressure in tires using tire inflation gage and hose assembly.
Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure. See table 1-7.
Step 2. Check power steering reservoir oil level.
If low, add proper oil to FULL mark on dipstick (para 3-1Oc/).
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
32. OIL LEAKS.
All causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
SPECIAL BODY EQUIPMENT:
FRONT WINCH
33. WINCH DRUM DOES NOT TURN FREELY WHEN PULLING OUT CABLE.
Step I. Check to see if drum lock knob is engaged. fl
Pull out drum lock knob, rotate 90 degrees, and release. Refer to
paragraph 2- 19.
Step 2. On vehicles with level wind device, check to see if level wind lock knob and I
cable tensioner lock knob and lever are engaged. I
Release level wind lock knob and cable tensioner lock knob and lever.
TA 092379
Change 1 3-11
Page 234
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
34. WINCH DOES NOT WIND.
Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir.
If low, add oil to proper level. Refer to paragraph 2-19.
| Step 2. Check to see if winch clutch lever is released.
Engage clutch lever.
Step 3. On vehicles with level wind device, check to see if tensioner lever is not
positioned all the way towards left side of vehicle.
Pull tensioner lever all the way towards left side of vehicle.
Step 4. Check to see if transfer lever is shifted down to HIGH gear position.
If not, shift transfer to HIGH gear.
Step 5. Check to see if power takeoff is engaged.
If not, engage power takeoff.
Step 6. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
DUMP BODY HOIST ASSEMBLY
35. HOIST DOES NOT LIFT DUMP BODY.
Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir.
If low, add oil to proper level. Refer to LO-9-2320-272-12.
Step 2. Check for hydraulic leaks.
Tighten loose connections using crescent wrench. If leaks continue, notify
organizational maintenance.
TA 092380
3-12 Change 1
Page 235
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 3. Check to see if transfer lever is shifted to HIGH gear.
If not, shift transfer to HIGH gear.
Step 4. Check to see if power takeoff is engaged.
If not, engage power takeoff.
Step 5. Check to see if dump body control lever is pulled back to RAISE position.
If not, pull lever back to RAISE position.
Step 6. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
36. BODY RAISES TO FULL DUMP BUT DOES NOT POWER DOWN.
Step 1 . Check to see if dump. body control lever is pushed full forward to LOWER
position.
If not, push lever full forward to LOWER position.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
37. HYDRAULIC PUMP NOISY.
Step 1. Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-22.
If low, add oil to proper level. See LO 9-2320-272-12.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
38. TAILGATE DOES NOT OPEN.
Step 1. Check to see if tailgate control rod is pulled back and down to unlock
tailgate.
If not, pull tailgate control rod back and down to unlock tailgate.
TA 092381
Change 1 3-13
Page 236
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 2. Check to see if tailgate chains are restricting tailgate from opening.
Reposition tailgate chains so they will not restrict opening of tailgate.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
FIFTH WHEEL ASSEMBLY
39. FIFTH WHEEL NOT OPERATING.
Step 1. Check lubrication.
Lubricate as necessary (see LO 9-2320-272-12).
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
HYDRAULIC CRANE
40. LACK OF POWER.
Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-4.
If low, add oil to proper level. See LO 9-2320-272-12.
Step 2. Check for hydraulic leaks.
Tighten loose connections using crescent wrench. If leaks continue, notify
organizational maintenance.
Step 3. Check to see if tachometer indicates 1,250 rpm.
If not, adjust hand throttle control so engine idle speed is set at 1,250 rpm.
Step 4. Check to see if transmission selector lever is in "1-5" (drive).
If not, place transmission selector lever in "1-5" (drive).
Step 5. Check to see if transfer power takeoff is pulled back to engaged position.
If not, pull transfer power takeoff lever back to engaged position.
TA 092382
3-14 Change 1
Page 237
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 6. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
41. CRANE DOES NOT LIFT.
Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-4.
If low, add oil to proper level. See LO 9-2320-272-12.
Step 2. Check for hydraulic leaks.
Tighten loose connections using crescent wrench. If leaks continue, notify
organizational maintenance.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
42. HYDRAULIC PUMP NOISY.
Step 1. Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-4.
If low, add oil to proper level. See LO 9-2320-272-12.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
43. VEHICLE ROLLS WHILE OPERATING CRANE.
Step 1. Check to see if brake-lock switch is in LOCK position.
If not, put brake-lock switch in LOCK position.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
REAR WINCH
44. WINCH FAILS TO OPERATE OR LACKS POWER.
Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-4.
If low, add oil to proper level. See LO 9-2320-272-12.
TA 092383
Change 1 3-15
Page 238
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTIONCORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 2. Check for hydraulic leaks.
Tighten loose connections using crescent wrench. If leaks continue, notify
organizational maintenance.
Step 3. Check to see it tachometer indicates 900 rpm.
If not, adjust hand throttle control so engine idle speed is set at 900 rpm.
Step 4. Check to see if transmission selector lever is in "1-3" (third) gear for heavy
loads or in "1-5" (drive position) for light loads.
If not, place transmission selector lever in "1-3" (third) gear or "1-5" (drive
position) depending on weight of load.
Step 5. Check to see if transfer power takeoff shift lever is pulled back to engaged
position.
If not, pull transfer power takeoff shift lever back to engaged position.
Step 6. Check to see if level wind lock knob is released.
If not, release level wind lock knob.
Step 7. Check to see if torque control lever is engaged.
If not, engage torque control lever.
Step 8. Check to see if cable tensioner switch is down to engaged position for
winding operation.
If not, pull cable tensioner switch down to engage tensioner for winding
operation.
Step 9. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
45. VEHICLE ROLLS WHILE OPERATING REAR WINCH.
Step 1. Check to see if brake-lock switch is in LOCK position.
If not, put brake-lock switch in LOCK position.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 092384
3-16 Change 1
Page 239
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
EXPANSIBLE VANS
46. POWER LIFT GATE DOES NOT OPERATE OR LACKS POWER.
Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in lift gate reservoir with platform lowered to
ground.
Oil tank should be half full. If not, fill to proper oil level (see
LO 9-2320-272-12).
Step 2. Check for hydraulic oil leaks.
Tighten loose connections using crescent wrench. If leaks continue, notify
organizational maintenance.
Step 3. Check to see if tachometer indicates 1,000 to 1,200 rpm.
If not, adjust hand throttle control so engine idle speed is set at 1,000 to
1,200 rpm.
Step 4. Check to see if transfer power takeoff is pulled back to ENGAGED
position.
If not. pull transfer power takeoff back to ENGAGED position.
Step 5. Check outside power cable for secure connections if liftgate is powered
from outside electrical source.
Connect power cable securely to power entrance receptacle and power
source:
Step 6. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
47. VAN BODY NOT WATERPROOF OR LIGHT SHINES THROUGH GAPS AT
SIDE PANEL.
Step I. Check toggle clamps at side panels. Refer to paragraph 2-24.
If toggle clamp does not draw top of side panel tight enough, loosen
locknut on toggle clamp eyebolt using crescent wrench. Screw eyebolt
inward to close the gap. Tighten locknut.
TA 092385
Change 1 3-17
Page 240
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 2. Check to see if roof is properly seated.
If not, loosen toggle clamp and push up on hinged roof and out on end
panels while reclosing toggle clamps to ensure seal alinement.
Step 3. Check to see if blackout panels are closed properly.
If not, slide up blackout panels on van sides and rear doors until they latch
in closed position.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
48. CEILING LIGHTS AND SERVICE RECEPTACLES FAIL TO ENERGIZE
WHEN DOORS ARE CLOSED UNDER BLACKOUT CONDITIONS.
Step 1. Check to see if blackout circuit switch and /or main circuit breaker
switches are turned off. Refer to paragraph 2-24.
Turn on switches.
Step 2. Check to see if blackout switch is turned off. Refer to paragraph 2-24/.
Turn on blackout switch.
Step 3. Check outside power cable for secure connections if electrical power is
supplied from outside source.
Connect power cable securely to power entrance receptacle and power
source.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
49. EMERGENCY LIGHT, BLACKOUT LIGHT, AND CEILING LIGHTS FAIL TO
ILLUMINATE.
Step 1 . Check to see if main circuit breaker and / or light switches are turned off.
Turn on main circuit breaker or light switches.
Step 2. Check outside power cable for secure connections if electrical power is
supplied from outside source.
Connect power cable securely to power entrance receptacle and power
source.
TA 092386
3-18 Change 1
Page 241
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTIONCORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
50. HEATER WILL NOT IGNITE.
Step 1 . Check to see if main circuit breaker and / or heater switches are turned off.
Refer to paragraph 2-24g.
Turn on main circuit breaker or heater switches.
Step 2. Check to see if thermostat is set to desired temperature.
If not, set thermostat properly.
Step 3. Check fuel level on fuel gage.
Fill fuel tank as necessary.
Step 4. For electrically powered right heater (M935 only), check outside power
cable for secure connections if electrical power is supplied from outside
source.
Connect power cable securely to power entrance receptacle and power
source.
Step 5. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
51. AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR FAILS TO START.
Step l. Check to see if bonnet door is closed. Refer to paragraph 2-24/?.
Push bonnet door control rod forward to open bonnet door.
Step 2. Check to see if main circuit breaker and /or air conditioner switches in
circuit breaker box are turned off.
Turn on main circuit breaker or air conditioner switches.
Step 3. Check to see if power input switch and /or compressor circuit breaker are
turned off.
Turn on power input switch or compressor circuit breaker.
TA 092387
Change 1 3-19
Page 242
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
I Step 4. Check to see if compressor switch is turned to HIGH when starting air
conditioner.
If not, turn compressor switch to HIGH when starting air conditioner.
Step 5. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS:
DEEP WATER FORDING KIT
52. FORDING CONTROL HANDLE INOPERATIVE.
Step 1. Check to see if control handle cable is broken, kinked, or corroded.
Notify organizational maintenance.
Step 2. All other causes, including inoperative fording valve(s).
Notify organizational maintenance.
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT
53. ENGINE FAILS TO REACH OPERATING TEMPERATURE.
Step 1. Check to see if radiator cover flap is opened. Refer to paragraph 2-29.
Roll cover flap down.
Step 2. Other causes
Notify organizational maintenance.
54. ENGINE TEMPERATURE APPROACHES 195°F (90°C).
Step 1. Check to see if radiator cover flap is closed. Refer to paragraph 2-29.
Roll up cover flap and secure.
Step 2. Check coolant level in surge tank.
Add coolant to surge tank until at least 3/4 full. Check for leakage from
tank and hoses. If leaking, notify organizational maintenance.
TA 092388
3-20 Change 1
Page 243
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
55. FUEL BURNING PERSONNEL HEATER FAILS TO START WHEN
RUN-OFF-START SWITCH IS HELD IN START POSITION.
NOTE
Heater will not operate if RUN-OFF-START switch is moved to RUN position
before indicator lamp lights up.
Step 1. Check to see if electric fuel pump shutoff valve is closed. Refer to
paragraph 2-29.
Open fuel pump shutoff valve.
Step 2. Check if engine is not running.
Start engine.
Step 3. Check fuel level on fuel gage.
Fill fuel tank(s) if necessary.
Step 4. Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button on heater control box to check
operation of circuit.
If indicator lamp does not light up, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 5. Check to see if HI-LO switch on heater control box is set to HI position.
Set HI-LO switch to HI position.
Step 6. All other causes, including defective switch.
Notify organizational maintenance.
56. ENGINE COOLANT HEATER FAILS TO START WHEN RUN-OFF-START
SWITCH IS HELD IN START POSITION.
WARNING
Exhaust gases can kill. Do not operate engine coolant heater in closed area
occupied by personnel.
TA 090301
3-21
Page 244
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine coolant heater and personnel heater at the same time.
NOTE
Heater will not operate if RUN-OFF-START switch is moved to RUN position
before indicator lamp lights up.
Step 1 . Check to see if heater fuel shutoff valve located in tool box and electric fuel
pump shutoff valve located near air cleaner assembly are closed. Refer to
paragraph 2-29.
Open both fuel shutoff valves.
Step 2. Check to see if battery switch is in OFF position.
Turn battery switch to ON position.
Step 3. Check fuel level on fuel gage.
Fill fuel tank(s) if necessary.
Step 4. Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button on heater control box to check
operation of circuit.
If indicator lamp does not light up, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 5. Check to see if HI-LO switch on heater control box is set to HI or LO
position.
Set HI-LO switch to HI or LO position.
NOTE
Select HI position if engine is cold. Select LO position if engine is already well
heated. Switch will automatically change to LO position when coolant
temperature exceeds 195°F (90° C). Switch will automatically change to HI
position when coolant temperature drops below 120°F (48° C).
TA 090302
3-22
Page 245
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 6. All other causes, including defective switch.
Notify organizational maintenance.
57. EXCESSIVE ELAPSED TIME BEFORE HEATER IGNITION.
Step 1. Check battery indicator gage.
If needle is not in green area, see malfunction 1, step 3. If this does not
remedy problem, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
58. HEATER FAILS TO CONTINUE BURNING.
Step 1. Check fuel level on fuel gage.
Fill fuel tank(s) if necessary.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
59. HEATER OUTPUT IS LOW.
Step 1. Check if Hl-LO switch is in LO position.
Set switch to HI position.
TA 090303
3-23
Page 246
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 2. All other causes, including defective fuel system or defective heater.
Notify organizational maintenance.
60. WINDSHIELD DEFROSTERS NOT OPERATING.
Step 1. Check adjustment of defroster control handle.
Adjust defroster control handle.
Step 2. Check for restrictions in defroster deflectors.
Clear restriction.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
61. ENGINE OIL SHROUD NOT RECEIVING HEAT (ENGINE COOLANT
HEATER ONLY).
Step 1. Check to see if coolant heater is operating. Refer to paragraph 2-29J.
Start heater. If inoperative, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 2. Check to see if coolant heater exhaust tube is disconnected from oil pan
shroud.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 090304
3-24
Page 247
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
62. ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM NOT RECEIVING HEAT (ENGINE COOLANT
HEATER ONLY).
Step 1. Check to see if coolant heater is operating. Refer to paragraph 2-29.
Start heater. If inoperative, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 2. Check to see if one or more shutoff cocks are closed at engine or coolant
heater.
Open coolant shutoff cock(s).
Step 3. Check for restriction in coolant hose(s).
Notify organizational maintenance.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
A-FRAME KIT
63. WINCH INOPERATIVE.
Check winch.
See malfunction nos. 33 and 34.
64. A-FRAME INOPERATIVE OR MISALINED.
Step 1. Check to see if cable is secured in towing pintle.
If not, secure cable in towing pintle and lock pintle in closed position.
Step 2. Check for loose cable clamps and frays or breaks in cable.
Notify organizational maintenance.
Step 3. Check to see if A-frame is bent.
Notify organizational maintenance.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 092389
I
Change 1 3-25
Page 248
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ELECTRIC BRAKE KIT
65. TRAILER BRAKES DO NOT APPLY SUFFICIENTLY WHEN SERVICE
BRAKES ARE DEPRESSED.
Step 1. Check to see if rheostat setting is too low forthe load being towed. Refer to
paragraph 2-31.
Raise rheostat setting to adjust for heavy payload.
Step 2. Check to see if trailer electrical cable is not securely connected to receptacle
above pintle hook.
Securely connect electrical cable to receptacle.
Step 3. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
66. TRAILER BRAKES GRAB TOO HARD WHEN SERVICE BRAKES ARE
DEPRESSED.
Step 1. Check to see if rheostat setting is too high for the load being towed.
Lower rheostat setting to adjust for light load.
Step 2. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
AIRBRAKE CONTROL KIT
67. TRAILER AIRBRAKES DO NOT APPLY WHEN AIRBRAKE CONTROL
HANDLE IS PULLED DOWN.
Step 1 . Check to see if trailer air supply valve is not in pressed-in position. Referto
paragraph 2 32.
Press in trailer air supply valve and hold in place for fifteen seconds.
Release valve. If valve does not stay in, notify organizational maintenance.
Step 2. Check to see if trailer air lines are not securely connected to glad hands of
towing truck.
Securely connect trailer air lines to glad hands.
TA 090306
3-26
Page 249
TM 9-2320-272-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 3. Check to see if glad hand valves are closed.
Open glad hand valves.
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify organizational maintenance.
TA 090307
3-27
Page 250
TM 9-2320-272-10
Section IV. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
13- 9. General.! The operator/ crew is responsible for daily, weekly, and monthly
preventive maintenance checks and services listed in table 2-2. Certain other
maintenance services, also the responsibility of the operator/ crew, are listed in this
section.
13-10. Engine Service. |
a. General. To perform engine service the hood must be unlatched and secured in the
opened position. After completing engine service, release hood, lower it to fixed
position, and latch it. Refer to paragraph 2-3.
b. Engine Crankcase Oil Level.
CAUTION
Never operate engine with oil level below L (low) level mark or
above H (high) level mark.
(1) Oil level dipstick (4) is located on
right side engine compartment directly
below coolant surge tank (2).
(2) Turn dipstick handle
counterclockwise to free dipstick (4) from
dipstick tube (3) and withdraw dipstick (4). -|
(3) Wipe clean and return to dipstick
tube (3) but do not tighten handle.
(4) Withdraw dipstick (4) slowly to
prevent a false reading. Keep oil level as
near as possible to H (high) mark on
dipstick. Seven quarts (6.6 liters) of oil are
required to raise oil level from L (low)
mark to H (high) mark on dipstick.
(5) If engine oil level is low, remove oil filler cap, located at top of engine, and
add engine oil as prescribed in LO 9-2320-272- 12. Do not overfill. Replace oil filler
cap, tighten cap securely, and wipe away any oil spilled.
(6) After checking or adjusting oil level, reinstall dipstick (4) in tube (3). Make
sure dipstick (4) is seated in tube opening, then tighten handle by turning it clockwise.
TA 092390
3-28 Change 1
Page 251
TM 9-2320-272-10
c. Coolant Surge Tank.
WARNING
Extreme care should be taken when removing surge tank filler
cap (1) if temperature gage reads above 195°F (90°C). Do not
add coolant to cooling system when engine is hot unless engine is
running. Add coolant slowly.
(1) Remove coolant surge tank filler cap (1). Visually check coolant level. Surge
tank (2) should be three-fourths full before operation, slightly above three-fourths full
after operation.
(2) If coolant level is low, add until three-fourths full.
(3) If it is necessary to add coolant during operation or after operation, follow
WARNING procedure above.
d. Power Steering Reservoir.
(1) The power steering reservoir (7) is
located on left side of engine near the
radiator. Check oil level with reservoir
dipstick (6), after operation while engine is
hot. Oil level should be at FULL mark on
dipstick (6).
(2) If oil level is low, add oil as
prescribed in LO 9-2320-272-12. Replace oil
filler cap (5), tighten securely, and wipe
away any oil spilled.
e. Fuel Filter.
(1) Service Operation.
(a) The fuel filter (9) is located under
left-front fender and requires daily
maintenance, normally before operation.
Two petcocks (8) must be opened, drained,
and then closed for service.
(b) Open fuel line inlet petcock (8)
located near top of fuel filter (9).
TA 090309
3-29
Page 252
TM 9-2320-272-10
(f) After service has been completed, cl
(2) at bottom of fuel filter.
(c) Open petcock (2) at bottom of fuel
filter and drain off approximately one pint
(0.473 liters) of liquid into a container.
(d) If there are large amounts of water
and impurities, allow fuel to drain until
fuel is clear. If complete draining is
necessary to obtain clear fuel, inspect fuel
tank(s) and fueling source for
contamination.
(e) If fuel tank(s) are found to be
contaminated with water and impurities,
complete draining is required. This is
coordinated with organizational
maintenance. The fuel filter element will
also be serviced at this time.
;e fuel line inlet petcock (1) and petcock
(2) Priming Fuel System.
(a) The fuel system must be primed whenever the fuel filter element is replaced
and after a complete draining of the fuel system.
(b) Open air purge petcock (3) at hand priming pump (4).
(c) Place a two-gallon container under air purge petcock (3). Operate hand primer
pump (4) to discharge a combination of fuel and air from the fuel systm. Continue
pumping until all air is expelled and a steady How of fuel is observed. Stop hand
primer pump (4) operation and close air purge petcock (3). Dispose of waste fuel
properly.
(3) Final Inspection. Start engine and check for unusual noises and any fuel
system leaks.
TA 090310
3-30
Page 253
TM 9-2320-272-10
/ Air Cleaner.
(1) General. Air cleaner service is required whenever the red band is visible in
window of air cleaner indicator (5) on instrument panel. The operator will service the
air cleaner in an emergency situation.
WARNING
Keep fingers out from under or directly
above the locking end of securing latches
during removal or installation. Serious
injury can result if fingers are caught
beneath latches and or if fingers are
struck by latch when 'unsnapped.
CAUTION
Do not operate engine without an air
cleaner element except in extreme
emergency.
(2) Removal.
(a) Release latch securing rear retaining strap (7), and spread apart strap (7).
(b) Release five latches securing air cleaner body (8) to air cleaner manifold (6).
(c) Remove air cleaner body (8). gasket (9), and element (10).
NOTE
Notify organizational maintenance if filter element (10) is
damaged, or cannot be cleaned by tapping.
(3) Cleaning Element by Tapping.
CAUTION
Do not strike ends of element (10) on hard surface, or damage can
result.
TA 090311
3-31
Page 254
TM 9-2320-272-10
(a) Hold element (1) so neither end
(a) Position air cleaner element (1). and gasket (2) in air cleaner manifold (5) with
closed end of element (1) facing outward.
WARNING
Keep fingers out from under or directly above the locking end of
securing latches during removal or installation. Serious injury can
result if fingers are caught beneath latches and /or if fingers are
struck by latch when unsnapped.
(b) Position air cleaner body (3) over element (1) with arrows on end of body (3)
pointing up.
(c) Secure cleaner body (3) to manifold (5) with five latches.
(d) Secure rear retaining strap to hanger (4).
(6) Final Inspection. Start engine and press top of air cleaner indicator to release
red band. If red band does not disappear, report condition to organizational
maintenance.
TA 090312
3-32
Page 255
TM 9-2320-272-10
3-11. Air Reservoirs. I
a. General. Four drain cocks, located on right side of vehicle next to tool box, are
used to drain moisture from four air reservoirs after each day's operation.
b. Service.
(1) Turn drain cocks counterclockwise to drain moisture from:
(a) Primary airbrake system air
reservoir (6).
(b) Secondary airbrake system air
reservoir (7).
(c) Airbrake system wet tank
reservoir (8).
(d) Spring brake air reservoir (9).
(2) After all moisture has been drained and air only is coming out, turn drain
cocks clockwise to close.
c. Final Inspection. Make sure drain cocks are closed tight to prevent air escaping.
If air escapes after drain cocks are closed tight, notify organizational maintenance
immediately.
3-12. Transmission Oil Level.
a. General. The transmission oil level is checked weekly with engine running at idle
and transmission in neutral. Transmission oil level dipstick (11) is located under trap
door (10) on floor of cab in front of two-person crew seat.
b. Checking Oil Level.
(1) Clean around end of fill pipe (12)
before removing dipstick.
(2) Turn dipstick handle (11)
counterclockwise and pull out dipstick.
(3) Wipe clean and return dipstick to
fill pipe (12) but do not tighten handle (11).
TA 090313
3-33
Page 256
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Withdraw dipstick slowly to prevent a false reading. If transmission oil
temperature gage (1) on instrument panel reads 180°F (82° C) or below, level on
dipstick (2) should show between marks designated for normal run (3).
CAUTION
Do not overfill transmission.
(5) If transmission oil level is low, add oil through fill pipe as prescribed in
LO 9-2320-272- 12. Return dipstick to fill pipe, tighten dipstick handle, and wipe awa
any oil spilled.
3-13. Wheels and Tires.
a. General. Tires are checked for cuts, gouges, cracks, penetrating objects, and flats
before operation. Proper air pressure is checked weekly. Tires found to be flat must be
replaced. Stop vehicle immediately, if tactical situation permits, whenever a tire
becomes flat while operating.
b. Spare Tire Removal. Models M923 through M928. M93I. and M932 are equipped
with extendable spare tire boom. Dump trueks (M929. M930), and vans )M934, M935),
employ stationary chain falls. Wrecker (M936) models use the vehicle crane to lift and
lower spare tire.
TA 090314
3-34
Page 257
TM 9-2320-272-10
(1) Obtain chain fall (1 1) from tool compartment on right side of vehicle.
(2) Hook chain fall (1 1) to chain (12) securing tire and boom roller (8).
(3) Remove retaining pin (9) from boom brace (10), and slide out boom (7) until
holes are alined with boom brace (10). Secure with retaining pin (9).
(4) Remove wing-nut locking pin (4), and wing-nut (5) securing wheel brace (14) to
threaded bar (6).
(5) Lift wheel brace (14) from boom base (13), and threaded bar (6). Lower
threaded bar (6) until resting flat on boom base (13).
(6) Pull chain (12) to slightly raise tire and slide tire along boom (7) until roller (8)
hits stop (15).
WARNING
Keep tire from swinging. Serious injury can be caused if
personnel are struck by a swinging tire.
(7) Pull on chain (12) to lower tire to ground.
(8) Remove chain (12) securing tire to
c. Tire Removal.
(1) Apply vehicle hand brake. If
vehicle is on an incline, chock wheels on
both sides.
(2) Remove hydraulic jack (17), jack
handle (16), wheel stud nut wrench (18),
and handle (20) from tool compartment on
right side of vehicle.
in fall (11).
(3) Install wheel stud nut handle (20)
through wrench (18) and lit wrench (18) on
wheel stud nuts (19). Loosen all wheel stud
nuts (19) but do not remove.
NOTE
Wheel stud nuts (19) on the left
side have left-hand threads.
Those on the right have right-
hand threads. Studs and nuts
are marked L and R accord
ingly.
TA 090315
3-35
Page 258
TM 9-2320-272-10
(4) Turn jack screw (1) of jack (5) out approximately three inches (7.6 cm). Close
bleeder valve (4) at base of jack (5) by turning valve (4) clockwise with slotted end of
jack handle (3).
NOTE
Place a block under jack (5) if used on soft terrain.
(5) Position jack (5) under axle housing (2) near wheel to be removed. Insert
handle (3) into jack (5). Move jack handle (3) up and down until tire is off the ground.
(6) Remove all wheel stud nuts from wheel to be removed. Remove wheel from
axle. If inner wheel is to be removed, reverse wheel stud nut wrench (6), remove handle
(7), and install near large end of wrench (6). Remove all wheel stud nuts, then remove
inner wheel and tire assembly.
TA 090316
3-36
Page 259
TM 9-2320-272-10
d. Replacement.
NOTE
Tread depth and pattern of dual tires should be matched as
closely as possible.
(1) Position wheel and tire on axle hub over wheel studs. On inner and front
wheels, ventilating hole should be alined with brake drum inspection hole (8). If inner
wheel was replaced, make certain inner stud nuts are properly seated as they are
installed. Tighten securely in sequence shown.
NOTE
Have stud nuts checked and torqued to 450-500 lb-It
(610 678 N«m) by organizational maintenance as soon as
possible.
(2) Place outer wheel over axle hub and position so valve stem is opposite to that
of inner wheel. Ventilating holes in outer wheels should be directly alined with
ventilating holes in the inner wheel. Tighten all wheel stud nuts securely in sequence
shown above.
(3) Use slotted end of jack handle (3) to turn bleeder valve (4) counterclockwise.
When tires touch ground, remove jack (5) from under axle housing. Replace wheel and
tire removed on to spare wheel and tire carrier.
NOTE
Return unserviceable wheel and tire assembly to organizational
maintenance for repair, replacement, or exchange.
TA 090317
3-37
Page 260
TM 9-2320-272-10
3-14. Tire Inflation.
a. General. Tires require a pressure check on a weekly basis. Inflation pressure is
one of the most important elements of tire care. Pressure recommendations for tires on
all models have been carefully selected to provide good tire life. See table 1-7 for
recommended tire pressures. Check and adjust tire pressures when tires are cold,
because pressures normally increase during operation. Never decrease pressure of warm
tires except for operations in mud, sand or snow. Reinflate tires which were deflated
for operations in mud, sand, or snow after operations are completed.
b. Tire Gaging.
(1) Remove tire inflation gage (10), and hose (4) assembly from tool compartment.
(2) Start at one corner of vehicle and gage all tires. Remove tire valve caps, apply
tire gage air chuck (8) on tire valve (7), and press down to read tire pressure on gage
dial (9). Reinstall tire valve caps and tighten caps finger tight.
c. Tire Inflation.
(I) Start engine and set hand brake. Make sure air reservoir pressure is higher
than recommended tire pressure by checking primary and secondary air pressure gages
on instrument panel.
(2) Remove glad-hand covers (3). Install tire inflation gage (10) and hose (4)
assembly coupling (5) to the left-front emergency trailer air glad-hand (l) to inflate
front tires and right-rear emergency trailer glad-hand (l) to inflate rear tires. Turn
trailer air valve handle (2) at glad-hand (l) 90° counterclockwise to release compressed
air to gage (10), and hose (4) assembly.
(3) Remove tire valve cap, apply air chuck (8) on tire valve stem (7), and press
down firmly. Depress air chuck lever (6) to inflate tire. Release lever (6) momentarily to
read tire pressure on gage dial (9). Adjust tire pressure as necessary.
(4) When tire inflation operation is completed, turn trailer air valve handle (2) 90°
clockwise to close. Uncouple gage (10). and hose (4) assembly from trailer air glad-hand
(I), and install cover (3) on glad-hand (I).
(5) Return tire inflation gage (10). and hose (4) assembly to tool compartment.
TA 0903 18
3-38
Page 261
TM 9-2320-272-10
3-15. Brake Service.
a. General. Spring brakes in M939 series trucks lock automatically and stop the
vehicle whenever a large loss of air pressure occurs. In such situations, the spring in
each spring brake must be manually disengaged before the vehicle can be towed away
for repairs. This procedure is performed by an operator only in an emergency.
b. Type of Brake. The spring brakes used in M939 series trucks contain a release bolt
(13) stored between the service chamber and spring brake chamber.
c. Releasing the Spring.
WARNING
Make sure vehicle hand brake is set and wheels are chocked
before releasing springs in spring brakes. Failure to do so may
result in vehicle rolling out of control.
(I) To release spring in brakes:
CAUTION
Do not lose rubber plugs (12). After removal, store all four plugs
in map compartment inside cab so they may be found and
reinstalled later by organizational maintenance.
(a) Remove rubber plug (12) from spring brake chamber (11).
CAUTION
If inside of brake chamber (11) is clogged with mud, sand, or
dirt, do not proceed with spring release operation unless the
chamber can be cleared. Notify organizational maintenance if
chamber cannot be cleared.
TA 090319
3-39
Page 262
TM 9-2320-272-10
(b) Visually inspect inside of brake chamber (4) for mud, sand or dirt.
(c) Remove nut (3), washer (2) and remove release bolt (1) from storage
housing (5).
(d) Insert T-end of release bolt (1) all the way into brake chamber (4) and turn
bolt one quarter of a turn.
(e) Pull on bolt (1) to make sure it is firmly holding spring plate within the
chamber.
NOTE
If release bolt (1) cannot be pulled directly out of spring chamber
(4) after it has been turned, bolt (1) is properly seated.
1(f) Insert washer (2) and nut (3) on end of release bolt (1). With adjustable wrench
tighten nut (3) down until it is in contact with spring chamber (4).
CAUTION
Measure thread of the release bolt only. Do not include nut (3)
in the three inch (7.6 centimeter) measurement of release bolt (1).
(g) Turn nut (3) clockwise until at least three inches (7.6 centimeters) of thread of
the release bolt (1) extends out of the spring brake chamber (4), washer (2), and
nut (3).
|3-16. Radiator Fan Clutch Emergency Service.
a. General. The radiator fan in M939 series trucks normally activates when the
engine temperature exceeds 185°F (85°C) within normal operating range of 165°F to
195° F (74°C to 90°C). It is possible, however, for the thermostat governing fan
operation to become damaged. This will result in engine overheating. In an emergency,
the operator can bypass the fan thermostat by bolting the fan to the engine's fan clutch
assembly. This procedure is performed by the operator only when service by
organizational maintenance personnel is not readily available.
TA 092391
3-40 Change 1
Page 263
TM 9-2320-272-10
b. Symptoms.
(1) Engine temperature exceeds 195° F (90° C) as indicated by temperature gage (8).
(2) Operator has stopped vehicle and allowed engine to idle as prescribed in
paragraph 2-36b(4).
(3) Temperature gage (8) indicates engine is not cooling, or engine temperature
continues to rise after two-minute idle period.
c. Inspection. With engine continuing to
idle, raise vehicle hood and inspect fan (9)
for operation. If fan is not turning, fan
clutch thermostat is damaged. Operator
must immediately shut down engine and
notify organizational maintenance. If
service is not readily available, perform
step d, emergency service.
d. Emergency Service.
WARNING
• Make certain battery switch (6) and ignition switch (7) are in
OFF position. Make certain crew inside vehicle cab are aware
of danger in engaging these switches while emergency service is
being performed. Failure to comply with this warning may
result in fan blade suddenly engaging, and in serious injury to
operator performing the emergency service.
• Do not allow hands to contact engine during emergency
service. Serious burns can result from contact with engine
block.
(1) Stop engine by shutting off ignition switch (7) and battery switch (6).
TA 090321
3-41
Page 264
TM 9-2320-272-10
(2) Raise and secure vehicle hood in up position. Refer to paragraph 2-17.
(3) With adjustable wrench, remove two clutch override lockup bolts (2) from
storage boss on fan clutch support bracket (1).
(4) Line up alinement mark (4) on side of fan mounting plate with alinement mark
(3) on side of fan clutch assembly. Fan mounting plate turns freely by hand.
NOTE
Because fan clutch assembly is a moving part when engine is
running, alinement mark (4) may be located in different position
from position shown in illustration.
(5) With alinement marks (4) and (3) lined up, insert two clutch override lockup
bolts (2) into holes of fan mounting plate and secure fan mounting plate to fan clutch
assembly.
(6) Tighten override lockup bolts (2) with adjustable wrench until fully seated.
(7) Close and secure hood (para 2-17).
(8) Start engine and allow engine to cool at idle speed until engine temperature
drops to normal operating temperature range of 165°F to I95°F (74° C to 90° C).
(9) Proceed to organizational maintenance with vehicle. Make certain
organizational maintenance is notified of emergency service performed on vehicle.
TA 092392
3-42 Change 1
Page 265
TM 9-2320-272-10
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
A-1. Publication Indexes.
The following indexes should be consulted frequently for latest changes or revisions and for
new publications relating to materiel covered in this manual.
Military Publications:
Index of Blank Forms
Index of Technical Manuals. Technical Bulletins. Supply
Manuals (Types 7, 8, and 9), Supply Bulletins and
Lubrication Orders
A-2. Other Publications:
a. Technical Manuals.
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) TM 38-750
Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in
Cold Weather (0° to -65° F) FM 9-207 |
b. Technical Bulletins.
Use of Antifreeze Solutions and Cleaning Compounds in Engine
Cooling Systems TB 750-651
c. Cold Weather Operations.
Basic Cold Weather Manual
Northern Operations
d. Lubrication Orders.
Lubrication Order, Truck, 5-Ton, 6x6, M939 Series LO 9-2320-272-12
e. Destruction to Prevent Enemy Use.
Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment
to Prevent Enemy Use TM 750-244-6
/ General.
Recommended Changes to DA Publications DA Form 2028-2
Maintenance Request DA Form 2407
Equipment Daily or Monthly Log DA Form 2408-1
Quality Deficiency Report (Category II) DA Form SF 368 ■
TA 092393
DA PAM 310-1
DA PAM 310-1
FM 31-70
FM 31-71
Change 1 A-1 (A-2 blank)
Page 267
TM 9-2320-272-10
APPENDIX B
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST
AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
Section I. INTRODUCTION
B-1 . Scope.
This appendix lists integral components and basic issue items for M939 series, 5-ton, 6x6,
trucks. The appendix is designed to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient
operation.
B-2. General.
a. Section II, Integral Components of the End Item. These items are installed in the
vehicle at time of manufacture or rebuild. (None authorized for M939 series.)
b. Section III, Basic Issue Items (BII). These are the minimum essential items
required to place and maintain M939 series vehicles in operation. Although shipped
separately packed, BII must accompany the truck during operation and whenever it is
transferred between accountable offices. The illustrations will assist you in identifying
each basic issue item.
B-3. Explanation of Columns.
a. Item Number. Number used to identify item called out in illustration.
b. National Stock Number. Indicates national stock number assigned to item which
will be used for requisitioning.
c. Description. Indicates Federal item name and, if required, a minimum description
to identify item.
d. Federal Supply Code for Manufacturer (FSCM).
Code Manufacturer
00741 Airco Industrial Gases, Div. of Air Reduction Co. Inc.
03306 Ampco Metal Div., Ampco — Pittsburgh Corp.
04741 White Motor Corp Autocar Division
06023 Rego Div. of Golconda Corp.
09386 Budd Co.. The Automotive Div.
17941 Uniweld Products Inc.
18876 Army Missile Command
19204 Rock Island Arsenal /
19207 U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Command
21440 Glamorene Products Corp.
21450 Army Weapons Command ATTN: AMSWE-REE-S
Ordnance Corps Engineering Standards Rock Island Arsenal
24617 General Motors Corp.
32779 Alert Stamping and Mfg. Co.. Inc.
TA 092394
Change 1 B-1
Page 268
TM 9-2320-272-10
Code Manufacturer
36346 Union Carbide Corp., Linde Div.
42527 National Cylinder Gas Div., Chemetron Corp.
55681 Smith Welding Equipment Div. of Tescom Corp.
55719 Snap-On Tools Corp.
56770 ANT Corp.
57068 Stanley Works
63026 Victor Equipment Co.
65814 Williams J H and Co.
77243 Peterson Mfg Co., Inc.
77348 Plumb Fayetter R Inc.
80063 Army Electronics Command Procurement and Production
Directorate
80244 General Services Administration Federal Supply Service
81337 Army Natick Laboratories Quality Assurance and Engineering
Office
81348 Federal Specifications Promulgated by General Service
Administration
81349 Military Specification Promulgated by Standardization Div.
Directorate of Logistic Services DSA
84150 Andrews Hardware and Metal Co.
90598 American Air Filter Co. Inc.. Defense Products Group
93389 Proto Tool Co.
96906 Military Standards
Ie. Part Number. Indicates primary number used by manufacturer for control of
design and characteristics of item, through engineering drawings, specifications,
standards, and inspection requirements, used to identify an item or range of items.
/ Usable on Code. "USABLE ON" codes help you identify items which are used on
different models. Codes used in this column are:
Code Used On Code Used On
A All V20 M929 wo/winch
V15 M923 wo/winch V19 M930 w/ winch
V13 M924 wo/winch V22 M931 wo/winch
V14 M925 w/winch V21 M932 w/winch
V12 M926 w/winch V24 M934 wo/winch
V17 M927 wo/winch V25 M935 wo/winch
V16 M928 w/winch V18 M936 w/winch
g. Quantity Required. This column lists quantity of each item required for a
complete major item.
NOTE
Publications packaged with equipment are TM 9-2320-272-10 and
LO 9-2320-272-12.
TA 092395
B-2 Change 1
Page 269
TM 9-2320-272-10
B-4. Abbreviations.
The following abbreviations appear in the description column.
Abbr. Explanation
ft foot (feet)
in. inch(es)
lb pound(s)
w/ with
wo/ without
pts pints
qts quarts
gals gallons
1 liter
cm centimeter
Section II. INTEGRAL COMPONENTS OF
END ITEM LIST
B-5. General.
These items are installed in the vehicle at time of manufacture or rebuild. (None authorized
for M939 series ).
Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
B-6. General.
These are the minimum essential terns required to place and maintain M 939 series vehicles in
operation. Although shipped separately packed, B1I must accompany the truck during
operation and whenever it is transferred between accountable offices. The illustrations will
assist you to identify each basic issue item.
TA 090326
Change 1 B-3
Page 270
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
COMMON EQUIPMENT, COMMON TOOLS
(all trucks and chassis)
1. 2540-00-670-2459 BAG: pamphlet, cotton duck,
3 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 11-1/4 in.
(in map compartment behind
crew seat) (19207) 7961712
A 1
2. 5140-00-315-2775 BAG: tool, cotton duck
10 in. x 20 in., w/flap (in
access step tool box)
(81337) 5-7-1
A 1
3. 5120-00-264-3796 WRENCH: open end, adj, 0 in.
to 1.322 in. jaw opng, 12 in. long,
phos finish, type I, class A
(in tool box) (19207) 1 1655778-5
A 1
4. 5120-00-227-7338 SCREWDRIVER: flat tip, hvy duty,
flared sides, steel handle with wood
inserts, sq. blade, 1/2 in. wide tip,
5 in. blade, 9-1^2 in. long [in tool
bag (2) (pg. B-4)] (96906) M S 1 5220-5
A 1
5. 5120-00-234-8912 SCREWDRIVER: cross tip,
Phillips type, plastic handle, no. 3, 6
blade, 10-1/8 in. long [in tool bag (2)
(pg. B-4)] (96906) MS 15224-6
A 1
in.
B-4 Change 1
Page 271
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
6. 5120-00-316-9217
9.
5120-00-243-2419
5120-00-595-8396
4910-01-038-2820
5120-00-061-8546
COMMON EQUIPMENT, COMMON TOOLS
(Cont'd)
WRENCH: wheel stud nut, A
straight, double socket, l-T/2 in.
hexagon opening, 13/ 16 in. square
opening, 17 in. to 19 in. long, type II,
size 1, no. 2 length (access step tool
box) (09386) 34379
HANDLE: bar, wheel stud nut A
wrench, 3/4 in. diameter x 30 in.
long, phosphate finish (in access
step tool box) (19207) 6196147
JACK: hydraulic, hand, 8-ton A
capacity, 1 1 in. closed, 23-1 /8 in.
open w/ operating lever (in access
step tool box) (04741) 16W233
GAGE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY: A
tire inflation, self contained w/ 15 ft
hose (in access step tool box)
(19207) 1 1677140-5
HAMMER: hand, machinists,
ball-peen, 2 lb, 15 in. to 17 in. lg,
type II, class I, style A (81348)
GGG-H-86
A w/front
winch
I
TA 092397
Change 1 B-5
Page 272
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-222-8852
I
5120-00-494-1911
5315-00-732-1019
5120-01-108-3095
5210-00-234-8913
COMMON EQUIPMENT, COMMON TOOLS
(Cont'd)
SCREWDRIVER: flat tip, flared A
sides, plastic handle, round blade.
1 /4 in. wide tip, 4 in. long blade,
7-3/4 in. overall length [in tool bag
(2) (pg. B-4)] (93389) 9832
PLIERS: combination, slip-joint, A
straight nose, w/cutter, 8 in. long,
phosphate finish [in tool bag (2)
(pg. B-4)] (19207) 1 1655775-3
WRENCH: oil drain plug, straight A
bar key, 1 /2 in. square, 2-1 /2 in.
long [in tool bag (2) (pg. B-4)]
(96906) MS20066-543
WRENCH: open end, adjustable, A
.95 jaw opening. 8 in. long (access
step tool box) (19207) 1 1655778-3
SCREWDRIVER: cross tip, A
Phillips, plastic handle, point
no. 2, 4 in. blade, 7-1/2 in. overall
length [in tool bag (pg. B-4)]
(19207) 1 1655777-12
TA 092398
B-6 Change 1
Page 273
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
4010-01-114-3728
7. 3950-01-110-9278
EQUIPMENT, SPARE TIRE HANDLING
CHAIN ASSEMBLY: single leg. All
w/grab hook, w/ring end link, except
750 lb work load, zinc finish V18
(in access step tool box)
(19207) 12256287
HOIST ASSEMBLY: chain, hand All
operated, hook suspension, except
250 lb rated load (in access V18
step tool box) (19207) 1 1669273
EQUIPMENT—MISCELLANEOUS
5340-00-912^086
9. 5340-00-682-1508
PADLOCK SET: keyed alike,
1-1/2 in. size, w/clevis and
chain, composed of 2 padlocks,
2 keys per set (tool box—vehicle
right side) (96906) MS21313-160
PADLOCK SET: keyed individ
ually, 1-1/2 in. size, w/clevis and
chain, w/2 keys (tool box—vehicle
right side) (96906) MS35647-3
VI5,V13,V14.
V12,V17,V16,
V22.V21
V20,VI9
TA 093186
Change 1 B-7
Page 274
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
With
Equp.
TOOLS, PIONEER
1. 5110-00-293-2336 AX: single bit, 4 lb. head weight,
4-3/4 in. cutting edge, 35-1 / 2 in. to
36-1 /2 in. long, type I, class 1,
design A, olive drab finish
[stowed in compartment no. IB
(pg. B-37)] (19207) 6150925
V18 1
2. 5120-00-243-2395 MATTOCK: pick type, 5 lb.
w/o handle, olive drab finish,
type 11, class F [stowed in compart
ment no. IB (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 1 1677022
V18 1
3. 5120-00-293-3336 SHOVEL: hand, round point,
D-handle, short, size 2,
olive drab finish, type IV,
class A, style 1 [stowed in
compartment no. IB (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 1 1656784
V18 1
4. 5120-00-288-6574 HANDLE: mattock pick, rail
road or clay pick, 36 in. long,
olive drab finish grade AA
[stowed in compartment no. IB
(pg. B-37)] (19207) 11677021
V18 1
TA 09033
B-8
Page 275
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
EXPANSIBLE VANS (M934 AND M935)
Usable
On Code
5. 6140-00-851-4573 CABLE: ground, 48 in. long,
w/rod (8380403) (stowed in rear
exterior compartment)
(19207) 7017575
V24,V25 1
6. 2510-00-790-2296 ROD: ground, 3/4 in. diameter
x 30 in. long, w/crossbar. Used
with ground cable (7017575)
(stowed in rear exterior com
partment) (19207) 8380403
V24,V25 1
7. 5120-00-650-7830 WRENCH: ratchet, reversible
w/removable socket, 3/4 in.
square drive (stowed on interior
of rear door, left-hand side)
(19207) 7759181
V24,V25 1
8. 5120-00-650-7829 WRENCH: socket, 90° offset,
1/2 in. square opening (stowed
on interior of rear door, left-hand
side) (19207) 8380406
V24,V25 1
Page 276
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
6150-00-134-0847
2540-00-957-5068
4210-00-775-0127
6150-00-134-0848
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
EXPANSIBLE VANS (M934 AND M935)
(Cont'd)
CABLE: electric, jumper, 600 volt, V24,V25
100 ft long w/coupling ends
(on power cable reel, right rear
of van) (19207) 11601643
LADDER: vehicle boarding, 4 ft V24,V25
long [stowed on rear doors—van
body (M934)], [stowed hydraulic
liftgate—van body (M935)]
(19207) 8759434
EXTINGUISHER ASSEMBLY: V24,V25
5 lb purple "K" dry chemical
w/ bracket (19207) 7015266
CABLE: electric, auxiliary, V24,V25
600 volt, 39-1/4 in. long (on
ceiling, front of van)
(19207) 11601641
2540-00-870-9939 COVER: cable reel, cotton duck
(over power cable—right rear
of van) (19207)
8735021
V24,V25
TA 093187
B-10 Change 1
Page 277
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5340-01-050-7059
7.
10.
2590-00-870-9936
2590-00-790-2293
5120-00-560-0617
2590-00-870-9937
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
EXPANSIBLE VANS (M934 AND M935)
(Cont'd)
PADLOCK SET: keyed alike, V24,V25
1-1/2 in. size, long shackle
composed of 9 padlocks and
5 keys, class 2 (on rear door,
ladders, storage compartments)
(96906) MS213I3-50
SPIKE: stabilizer anchor, V24,V25
welded (stowed in rear exterior
compartment) (19207) 7534689
HANDLE: leveling jack, V24,V25
5/8 in. dia, 19 in. lg (rear
compartment) (19207) 7534675
JACK: leveling vehicle, portable V24,V25
(rear compartment) (19207) 7534672
PLATE: leveling jack support V24,V25
(rear compartment) (19207) 7534676
I
TA 093188
Change 1 B-U
Page 278
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
I
4910-00-347-9703
4910-00-433-7094
2540-00-040-2300
2540-00-040-2301
3940-00-105-9933
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936)
BAR: lifting, whiffle-tree V18
[on right deck (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 8690061
BAR: towing, "V" universal type V18
w/ bumper axle clamp assembly
[on right deck (page B-37)]
(19204) 7551058
TUBE: boom jack, top [assembled V18
and stored on left deck
(page B-37)] (19207) 8330157
TUBE: boom jack, bottom V18
[assembled and stored on
left deck (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 8330158
BLOCK: rigging, steel wire V18
rope, single 8 in. sheave, w/ swivel
hook, 10-ton capacity, olive
drab finish [in compartment
no. 1C (pg. B-37)] (19207) 1 1631726
TA 093 189
B-12 Change 1
Page 279
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
3940-01-1 14-3690
3940-00-630-9932
4010-00-473-6166
2540-00-443-4845
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
BLOCK: rigging, wire rope. V18
double 8 in. sheave, w< swivel
shackle. 7/8 in. diameter rope.
25-ton capacity, olive drab finish
[in compartment no. IC (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 7080704
BLOCK: rigging, wire rope. V18
single 10 in. sheave w/swivel eye
and shackle, 3 4 in. diameter rope.
15-ton capacity, olive drab finish
[(in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 8383238
CHAIN: tow, single leg, 5/8 in. V18
link, 16 in. long, w/2 pear-shaped
coupling links, w/ 1 grab hook
end [(in compartment no. 1 B
(pg. B-37)] (19207) 7077063
CHAIN: utility, single leg, V18
3/8 in. link. 14-1, 2 ft long
w/2 grab hooks, zinc plate finish
[in compartment no. IB (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 10944642-2
TA 092399
Change 1 B-13
Page 280
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
2.
2540-00-315-2306
4010-00-449-6573
2590-00-140-7961
5120-00-293-0665
4020-00-231-2581
4020-00-238-7734
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
CHOCK: field [on left deck V18
(pg. B-37)] (19207) 8330150
CHAIN: utility, single leg, V18
3/4 in. link, 12 ft long, w/grab hook,
w/ pear-shaped coupling link [in
compartment no. IB (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 8744250
CABLE: slave, electric. 24 volts, V18
20 ft long,w/2 coupling ends
(NATO), w/ adapter (NATO-to-
standard) [in compartment no. I A,
pg. B-37)] (19207) I 1682379-1
BAR: wrecking, gooseneck V18
pinch point, w/claw, 3/4 in.
hexagon stock, 36 in. long, olive
drab finish, type V. class 1, style A
[in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]
(57068) 130
ROPE: manila, 3 strand, 3/8 in. V18
diameter. 1-1 /8 in. circumference.
50 ft long, 325 lb capacity
(81348) 21-R-373
ROPE: manila, 3 strand, 3/4 in. V18
diameter, 2-1/4 in. circumference,
50 ft long, 1,350 1b capacity.
(81348) 21-R-403
TA 092400
B-14 Change 1
Page 281
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
4020-00-231-9014
5120-00-224-1390
10.
2540-00-040-2299
51 10-00-238-8296
6240-00-274-4018
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
ROPE: manila, 3 strand, 1 in. V18
diameter, 3 in. circumference,
300 ft long, 2,250 lb capacity
(81348) 2I-R-418
CROWBAR: pinch-point, 1-1/4 in. V18
diameter stock, 59 in. to 62 in.
long, olive drab finish, type 11.
class I, size 4 [in compartment
no. 4 (pg. B-37)] (18876) 9150189
BASE PLATE: boom jack (in V18
mounting brackets, left and right
side of rear winch) (19207) 8330155
CHISEL: machinist's, cold, V18
hand, long length, 1 in. cutting
edge, 24 in. long, olive drab
finish, type IV, class 2 [in com
partment no. 1C (pg. B-37)] (03306)
C6
LIGHT: extension w sgl plug and V18
plug socket, 25 ft wo/ lamp
(32779) 2000 G2A
I
TA 092401
Change 1 B-15
Page 282
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
6545-00-922-1200
5120-00-243-9072
5340-00-838-5266
4. 4210-00-555-8837
5315-00-316-1008
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
FIRST-AID KIT: general V18
purpose, 12 unit [in compartment
no. I beneath crew seat (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 1 167701 1
VISE: bench and pipe, swivel V18
base, 5 in. stationary jaw,
w/1/8 in. to 4 in. pipe jaw (vehicle
front bumper) (19207) 7974484
PADLOCK SET: low security, V18
keyed alike, regular (open)
shackle, class 2 [in position
securing compartments nos. 1,
IA, IB, 1C, 2, 3, and 4
(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS2I313-124
FIRE EXTINGUISHER: hand. V18
purple "K" 2-3/4 lb.
capacity, w/ bracket, olive drab
finish [in brackets behind wrecker
crane control cab (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 10916537
PIN: tie-bar yoke, w/lock pin, V18
olive drab finish [in compartment
no. 3 (pg. B-37)] (19207) 8327939
TA 092402
B-16 Change 1
Page 283
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
9905-01-080-5684
7. 2540-00-040-2298
5340-00-543-3034
5340-00-753-3744
4720-00-899-6721
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
REFLECTOR, TRIANGLE V18
WARNING KIT: reflector type,
w /flags, w/ metal box [in com
partment no. 2 (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 10899404
TIE BAR: boom jack [on V18
left deck (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 8330152
STRAP: webbing, 1-1/2 in. V18
wide x 24 in. long, w/ buckle
(securing field chocks to vehicle
deck) [on left deck
(pg. B-37)] (19207) 8690516
STRAP: webbing, 1-1/2 in. V18
wide x 36 in. long, w/ buckle
(securing boom jacks to vehicle
deck) [on left deck (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 8690473
HOSE: tank drain, hydraulic V18
oil, 1-3/16 in. outside diameter
x 5 ft long, olive drab finish
[in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 10900093
TA 090340
B-17
Page 284
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
2530-00-706-1338
2590-00-040-2297
2590-00-740-9834
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
SLING: chain, double leg, V18
w/ring, w/2 hook ends, class 3
[in compartment no. IB (page
B-37)] (19207) 8330151
HOSE: air connecting, inter- V18
vehicular, 10-1 /2 ft long,
w/2 glad hand coupling ends
[in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 7061338
SLING: wire rope, double leg V18
w/ring, w/2 hook ends (ring ends
attach to block, two hook ends
attach to vehicle rear bumperettes)
(19207) 8330151
PIN: boom jack, w/lock pin, V18
olive drab finish [in compart
ment no. 3 (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 7409834
TA 092403
B-18 Change 1
Page 285
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
4930-00-266-9182
5120-00-050-5740
7. 4930-00-253-2478
5120-00-188-1790
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
OILER: hand, push bottom, V18
8 oz. capacity, 4 in. long spout
[on left deck (pg. B-37)]
(96906) MS 15764-1
HAMMER: hand, sledge, V18
blacksmith's, double-face, 10 lb ,
30 in. to 33 in. handle length,
olive drab finish, type X, class 1
[in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]
(77348) 2581
GREASE GUN: hand, lever V18
operated, 14 oz. cartridge or
bulk load, w/16 in. extension
[in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 5644803
JACK: hydraulic, hand, V18
self cont, 30-ton cap, w/oper
lever, OD finish (96906) MS16282-1 I
TA 092404
Change 1 B-19
Page 286
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Description
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
FSCM and Part No. On Code
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
1. 5315-00-854-4431 PIN: inner boom jack, w/lock V18
pin, olive drab finish [in com
partment no. 2 (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 10876413
1
2. 2540-00-318-0326 SHACKLE: lifting, round pin. V18
7/ 8 in. diameter, olive drab
finish [in compartment no. 2
(pg. B-37)] (19207) 7357967
2
3. 5120-00-224-1372 BAR: pinch, offset and tapered V18
ends, 1 in. hexagon stock. 36 in.
long, olive drab finish, type 111
[in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-B-101
1
4. 2540-00-860-2359 BAR: cranking, outrigger, VI 8
1 in. diameter, 12 in. long,
olive drab finish [one in compart
ment no. 3 and one in compartment
no. 2, (pg. B-37)] (19207) 10900233
2
5. 5110-00-188-2524 CUTTER: bolt, rigid head type, VI 8
clipper cut type, 9/ 16 in. diameter,
mild steel rod cutting capacity, 35 in.
to 39 in. long, olive drab finish (96906)
.MSI6888-4
1
6. 51 10-00-221-1075 CHISEL: blacksmith's, cold V18
handled, 1-1 /2 in. cutting edge, 16 in.
handle olive drab finish. (96906)
MS 16882-2
1
(7)
TA 092405
B-20 Change 1
Page 287
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
7. 3940-00-926-3710 BLOCK: tackle, manila rope,
single 4-3/4 in. sheave. 1 in.
diameter rope. 3 in. rope
circumference, w/ loose side hook,
w/becket, 1.700 lb capacity,
type II, class 1.
(81348) GGG-B-490
V18 1
8. 3940-00-926-3719 BLOCK: tackle, manila rope,
double 4-3 4 in. sheave, 1 in.
diameter rope. 3 in. rope
circumference, w/ loose side hook,
w/ becket, 2,450 lb capacity,
type II, class 2.
(81348) GG-B-490
V18 1
9. 5110-00-242-7147 SAW: crosscut l-man.4-1 2ft blade,
5 ft. long w/supplementary handle.
(96906) MS 165 15-2
V18 1
TA 092406
Change 1 B-21
Page 288
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS
litem
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-264-3793
5120-00-277-1244
5120-00-277-1245
5120-00-277-1242
5. 5120-00-277-1461
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-
MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)
WRENCH: auto, adjustable, V18
0 in. to 3-5/8 in. jaw opening.
15 in. long (24617)
2117080
WRENCH: open end. fixed. V18
single head, 15 degree head
angle, 1-5/8 in. opening,
15 in. long (65814) 710
WRENCH: open end. fixed, single V18
head. 15 degree head angle.
1-11/16 in. opening,
15 in. long (65814) 1010A
WRENCH: open end. fixed, single V18
head. 15 degree head angle.
1-13/ 16 in. opening.
16-1 /2 in. long
(19207) 6012498
WRENCH: pipe, heavy duty. V18
adjustable, 1 in. to 2 in. pipe
capacity, 18 in. long
(21440) 41 W664
TA 092407
B-22 Change 1
Page 289
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936)
6. 5110-00-289-9657 FRAME: hacksaw, hand,
adjustable, 10 in. to 12 in. blade,
open pistol grip handle, type 1,
class 1, style B [in tool box stored
in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(96906) MS 16516-1
V18 1
7. 5110-00-237-8106 BLADE: hacksaw, hand,
high-speed steel, 12 in. long,
type I, grade A, class 1 [in tool
box stored in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (81348) GGG-B-451
V18 '
8. 4240-00-269-7912 GOGGLES: industrial, chipper's,
w/eye cups, plastic, ventilated,
w/clear hardened glass lens (type 1),
50 mm diameter, non-polarized,
headband supported, over
spectacle type, w/o case, type 11,
class A [in tool box stored in
compartment no. I A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-G-5 13
V18 1
9. 5120-00-240-5328 WRENCH: open end, adjustable,
single-head type, 0.947 jaw
opening, 7-1 /2 in. to 8-1 /2 in.
long, phosphate finish, type I,
class 1 [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-W-63I
V18 1
——.— \fk _^ - i og^^
TA 092408
Change 1 B-23
Page 290
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-224-3153
5120-00-224-3154
3. 5120-00-224-3138
5120-00-293-3509
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
WRENCH: box, double V18
offset, double head, 12 point,
short length, 3/8 in. and 7/16 in.
openings, 4 in. long, type I,
class 2, style B [in tool box
stored in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS 16370-2
WRENCH: box, double offset, V18
double head, 12 point, short
length, 1/2 in. and 9/ 16 in.
openings, 4-3/4 in. long, type 1,
class 2, style B [in tool box
stored in compartment no. IB
(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS 16370-4
WRENCH: box, double offset, V18
double head, 12 point, short
length, 5/8 in. and 3/4 in. openings,
6 in. long, type 1, class 2, style B
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(96906) MS 16370-7
PUNCH: center, solid, 5/32 in. V18
diameter, tapered point, 3/8 in.
diameter stock, 4 in. long box
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1 A (pg. B-37)]
(19204) 41P3185
TA 090347
B-24
Page 291
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-965-0603
5110-00-186-7107
5120-00-293-0448
5120-00-221-7063
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
FLINT TI P: friction igniter, V 1 8
sleeve type, 6-4 ONC, 6 per box,
type 1, style B [in tool box stored
in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(22527) 12-010
CHISEL: hand, cold, 1/2 in. V18
cutting head, 5-3/4 in. long,
type IV, class 1 [in tool box
stored in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37] (96906) MSI7070-3
PUNCH: drift, 3/16 in. diameter V18
point, 3/8 in. diameter stock,
10 in. long, type IX, class A
[in tool box stored in compartment
no. 1A (pg. B-37] (40684) PT1208
SCRIBER: machinist's double V18
point, screwed, 1 straight and
1 regular bent, removable, 8 in.
to 10 in. long, type II, class 1
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1 A (pg. B-37)]
(18876) 9176642
1 box
TA 090348
Change 1 B-25
Page 292
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-277-4244
5120-00-494-191
5120-00-494-1895
7510-00-223-6708
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
WRENCH: plier, straight jaw, V18
8-1 /2 in. long, type I, class 1,
style B [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-W-649
WRENCH: plier, curved jaw V18
style. 8-1 2 in. long, type 1.
class 2. style B [in tool
box stored in compartment
no. 1A (page B-37)] (77243)
11R
CLAMP: plier, welder's upset V18
jaw style, 0 in. to 1-5/8 in.
clamping capacity. 2-5/8 in. jaw
width, 9 in. clamp length, type VI,
class C [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-C-406
CRAYON: marking, soapstone, V18
white, rectangular, 3/16 in. thick,
1 /2 in. wide, 5 in. long. 144 units
per box [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) SS-C-661
1 box
TA 092409
B-26 Change 1
Page 293
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5110-00-263-0341
51 10-00-242-5386
5110-00-234-6539
5110-00-234-6557
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
HANDLE: file, wood, 1-1/2 in. V18
diameter, 5-1/2 in. long, large
size, type II [in tool box stored
in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) NN-H-106
FILE: hand, American pattern, V18
mill type, single-cut bastard
faces, single-cut bastard edges,
12 in. heel to point, type XIII,
class 2, style A [in tool box
stored in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (81348) GGG-F-325
FILE: hand, American pattern, V18
flat type, double-cut bastard
faces, single-cut bastard edges,
12 in. heel to point, type VII,
style A [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(95683) 41F863
FILE: hand, American pattern, V18
round type, 1/2 in. diameter,
large section double-cut bastard
face, 12 in. heel to point, type XVI,
class I, style A [in tool box
stored in compartment no. 1A
pg. B-37)] (81348) GGG-F-325
TA 092410
Change 1 B-27
Page 294
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-585-2383
7920-00-246-8501
5120-00-965-0326
5120-00-277-8301
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
HAMMER: hand, welder's V18
14 oz. head weight, straight peen
and punch point, single bevel,
w/coiled spring handle, 10 in.
long, type 1. class I, style D,
[in tool box stored in com
partment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-H-35
BRUSH: wire, scratch, single V18
wire, curved handle, wire length
outside block is 1-1/8 in. to
1-1 /4 in., 4 rows wide, 18 rows
long, 10-1 /2 in. long, type III,
class 3 [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) HB 178/ 41
IGNITER: friction, wire frame V18
style, single flint, round file,
hooded type, type I, style A
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(90598) TJ212
WRENCH: open end, fixed VI 8
double head, 15 degree head
angle, engineer's, 5/8 in. and
11/16 in., phosphate finish, type IV
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1 A (pg. B-37)]
(96906) MS 16380-10
TA 093190
B-28 Change 1
Page 295
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-187-7124
5120-00-277-2342
5120-00-078-8948
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
WRENCH: open end, fixed V18
double head, 15 degree head
angle, engineer's. 1 2 in. and
9/16 in. openings. 5-1 2 in. long,
phosphate finish, type IV [in tool
box stored in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS 16380-4
WRENCH: open end. fixed V18
double head, 15 degree head
angle, engineer's. 3/8 in. and
7/16 in. openings, 4-1/8 in. long,
phosphate finish, type IV
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. I A (pg. B-37)]
(96906) MS 16370-2
SQUARE: combination. 1/ 100, V18
1/64. 1 /50. and 1/32 in. gradu
ations, cast iron square and miter
head, w scriber, w level, 12 in.
long, type VI. class A, style B
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) TY6CLASTYB
TA 093191
Change 1 B-29
Page 296
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
5120-00-239-0489
2. 5120-00-061-8546
5120-00-223-7398
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
RULE: multiple folding, wood
(class 1) or steel (class 2, grade A),
3 ft extended length (optional:
4 ft), 6 sections, smallest unit of
graduation: 1 / 16 in., type 111
[in tool box stored in com
partment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-R-791
HAMMER: hand, machinist's
ball-peen, 2 lb, 15 in. to 17 in.
long, w/ fiberglass handle, type 11,
class 1, style B [in tool box stored
in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(19207) 11677028-3
PLIERS: slip joint, straight nose,
combination w/cutter, 10 in. long,
phosphate finish type II, class 2,
style A [in tool box stored in com
partment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(65814) 10 PLIERS
SCREWDRIVER: flat tip. flared,
plastic handle, w wrench grip.
3/8 in. wide tip. 8 in. blade,
type I. class 5. style 1. description B.
shape B [in tool box stored in com
partment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
V18
V18
V18
V18
TA 09241 1
B-30 Change 1
Page 297
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
5. 5110-00-236-3272 CHISEL: hand, cold, 3/4 in.
cutting head, 6-1/2 in. long,
type IV, class 1 [in tool box stored
in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(96906) MS 17170-5
V18 1
6. 4240-00-203-3804 GOGGLES: industrial, welder's,
w/eye cups, plastic, ventilated,
w/ hardened glass cover lens
(type 111) 50 mm diameter
w/2 hardened spare cover lens,
headband supported, over specta
cle type, w/o case, type 11, class B
[in tool box stored in compart
ment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(81348) GGG-G-513
V18 1
7. 5140-00-498-8772 TOOL BOX: mechanic's, general,
w/tote tray, 21 in. long, 8-1/2 wide,
7-3/8 in. deep, olive drab finish,
type 11 [in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (80063) CH77
V18 1
B-31
Page 298
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
8415-00-268-7859
3439-00-383-3634
3433-01-070-9838
6680-00-285-6067
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
GLOVES: pair, leather, welder's V18 | 1 pair|
cowhide, gauntlet cuff, cotton
and wool knit lined, cream or
light gray, large, type II [in tool box
stored in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (84150) 02687859
CLEANER SET: welding and V18
cutting tip, 12 cleaners, sizes
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,J,K,L & M,
w/case [in tool box stored in
compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(00741) 832-4597
TORCH SET: cutting and V18 ! 1 set
welding, oxygen-acetylene,
medium duty, composed of the
following: [in compartment no. 1A
(pg. B-37)] (17941) KL-79
REGULATOR: pressure, com- V18
pressed gas. acetylene. 2-stage.
w/couplings. adapter and outlet,
type V [in compartment no. I A
(pg. B-37)] (63026) VTS 410-968
TA 092412
B-32 Change 1
Page 299
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
6680-00-641-3519
3433-00-373-1731
3433-00-373-1733
3433-00-373-1734
3433-00-373-1737
3433-00-373-1739
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
REGULATOR: pressure, com- V18
pressed gas. oxygen. 2-stage.
w/couplings, adapter and outlet,
tvpe VI [in compartment no. I A
(pg. B-37)] (36346) 03X05
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, V18
drill size 42 [in compartment
no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (56770) GXU-42
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, V18
drill size 50 [in compartment
no. I A (pg. B-37)] (06023) GXU50
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, V18
drill size 53 [in compartment no. I A
(pg. B-37)] (42527) GXU-53
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, Vl£
drill size 58 [in compartment
no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (06023) GXU-58
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, V18
drill size 62 [in compartment
no. lA(pg. B-37)] (56770) TWPI862
TA 092413
Change 1 6-33
Page 300
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Usable
On Code
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
3433-00-391-1218
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, cutting, V18
drill size 46 [in compartment
no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (06023) 250-46
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, cutting, V18
drill size 51 [in compartment
no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (42527) 250-51
TIP: oxygen-acetylene, cutting, V18
drill size 56 [in compartment
no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (42527) 250-56
TORCH WRENCH: oxygen- VI8
acetylene [in compartment no. 1A
(pg."B-37)] )58092) 7810
5.
I
8120-00-285-4763
8120-00-268-3360
CYLINDER: compressed gas, V18
oxygen, 250 cu ft capacity
[(behind cab, forward left side of
wrecker body)] (81349)
MIL-C-12661
CYLINDER: compressed gas, V18
acetylene, 225 cu ft capacity
[(behind cab, forward left side of
wrecker body)] (81349)
MIL-C-3701-4
TA 092414
B-34 Change 1
Page 301
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
7. 3433-00-391-1220 TORCH HANDLE: welding fin
compartment no. IA (pg. B-37)]
(63026) 100
VI8 1
8. 3433-00-356-8572 HOSE: rubber, braided, oxygen,
green, 5/16 in. diameter, 25 ft
long, w/couplings, type II, style A
[in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]
(55681) 5600FG
V18 1
9. HOSE: rubber, braided,
acetylene, red, 516 in. diameter,
25 ft long, w couplings, type II.
style A [in compartment no. I A
(pg. B-37)] (55681) 5600FR
V18 1
TA 092415
Change 1 B-35
Page 302
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
Description
FSCM and Part No.
Qty.
Furn.
With
Equp.
Item
No.
National Stock
No.
Usable
On Code
EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING
(M936) (Cont'd)
1. MIXING HEAD: oxygen-
acetylene welding torch, for tip
drill sizes 72 to 31 [in compart
ment no. 1 A (pg. B-37)]
(42527) 240-020527
V18 1
2. 3433-00-391-1215 CUTTING ATTACHMENT:
welding torch,angle of head,
75 degrees, use w/torch handle
(3433-00-391-1217) [in compart
ment no. 1 A (pg. B-37)]
58-1-75 (42527)
V18 1
TA 093192
B-36 Change 1
Page 303
TM 9-2320-272-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)
CYLINDER,
COMPRESSED GAS
OXYGEN
CYLINDER,
COMPRESSED GAS
ACETYLENE
COMPARTMENT
NO. IB
COMPARTMENT
NO. 1A
FIRE
EXTINGUISHER
HAND
TIE BAR, BOOM JACK*
OILER, HAND.
2-CHOCK, FIELD.
COMPARTMENT
NO. 2
BASE, BOOM JACK
COMPARTMENT
NO. 1
COMPARTMENT
NO. 4
MAP
COMPARTMENT
BOW, CANOPY
'COVER, GONDOLA
COMPARTMENT
NO. 1C
COMPARTMENT
NO. 3
BASE, BOOM JACK
TA 090359
Change 1 B-37 (B-38 blank)
Page 305
TM 9-2320-272-10
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
INTRODUCTION
C-1. Scope.
This appendix lists additional items authorized for support of M939 series trucks.
C-2. General.
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany your truck and do not have to be
turned in with it.
C-3. Explanation of Listing.
a. Descriptions, national stock numbers, and part numbers, are provided to help you
identify and request additional items you require to support this equipment. If item
required differs for different models, the model is shown under the "USABLE ON"
heading in the description column. Codes used are the same as in appendix B. Basic
Issue Items.
b. U/M is unit of measure for items listed.
c. QTY. AUTH. is the quantity of the item authorized.
TA 092416
Change 1 C-1
Page 306
TM 9-2320-272-10
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NO.
USABLE
ON CODE
U/M QTY
AUTH
4930-00-204-2550 ADAPTER: grease gun, rigid, thin-stem,
6 in. long, type IV, class 2, (81349)
MIL- 1-4387
V18 EA 1
5110-00-293-2336 AXE: single bit
(81348) 6150925
All
Except
V18
EA 1
6135-00-120-1020 BATTERY: dry, 1.5 volt. BA 30.
(96906) MS75059
V18 EA 4
3940-00-105-9933 BLOCK: rigging, steel, wire rope, single
8 in. sheave, w/swivel hook, 5/8 in. diam
eter rope. 10-ton sale work load (19207)
11631726
V14.V12.
VI6.V19.
V21.V18
EA 1
2590-00-473-6331 BRACKET: gas/water can (81349)
MS53052-1
V18 EA 1
7240-00-222-3088 CAN: gasoline, MIL tvpe. 5 gallon.
(80244) 11677019
V18 EA 1
7240-00-242-6153 CAN: water. MIL type. 5 gallon (80244)
OMC 3-3-22
V18 EA 1
2540-00-860-2354 CASE: crosscut saw. cotton duck.
63-3/4 in. long (closed) (96906) 10876420
VI8 EA I
4010-00-473-6166 CHAIN: utility, single leg. 5/8 in. link.
16 feet long, w/grab hook, w/2 pear-shaped
coupling links, olive drab finish (19207)
7077063
V14.V12.
V16.VI9,
V21.V18
EA 1
2540-00-933-9022 CHAIN: pneumatic tire, truck,
single tire, type TS. 1 1:00 x 20
All EA 2
TA 093193
C-2 Change 1
Page 307
TM 9-2320-272-10
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NO.
USABLE
ON CODE
U/M QTY
AUTH
2540-00-933-9599 CHAIN: pneumatic tire, truck,
dual tire type, 1 1:00 x 20
(96906) MS500054-10
All EA 4
2540-00-860-2355 COVER: fitted, gondola
(19207) 10876433
V18 EA 1
4210-00-775-0127 EXTINGUISHER: 5 lb, purple "K"
dry chemical, w/bracket
(19207) 7015266
All
Except
V18
EA I
4930-00-288-1511 EXTENSION: grease gun, flex hose.
12 in. long to 14 in. long
V18,V21.
V22
EA 1
6230-00-264-8261 FLASHLIGHT: electric, hand. 2-cell,
w/lamp and lens filter, w/o batteries,
type I, class A W-F-00421
V18 EA 2
5120-00-288-6574 HANDLE: mattock-pick, railroad
or clay pick (81348) NNH0093
All
Except
VI8
EA 1
KIT: first aid
(19207) 11677011
All
Except
V18
EA 1
6240-00-044-6914 LAMP: incandescent, S8 bulb, S contact,
bayonet base, 28V (96906)
MS35478-1683
V18 EA 1
5120-00-243-2375 MATTOCK: pick type, 5 lb. w/o handle
(81348) GGG-H-506
All
Except
V18
EA 1
5340-00-682-1505 PADLOCK SET: keyed alike, 1-3/4 in.,
w/clevis and chain, composed of
5 padlocks and 7 keys (96906)
MS21313-54
All
Except
V18
EA 1
TA 093194
Change 1 C-3
Page 308
TM 9-2320-272-10
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NO.
USABLE
ON CODE
U/M QTY
AUTH
9905-00-148-9546 REFLECTOR, TRIANGLE WARNING
KIT: reflector type, w/flags, w/metal box
(19207) 10899404
All
Except
V18
EA 1
5120-00-293-3336 SHOVEL: hand, rd. pt..
D handle, short size
(81348) GGG-S-326
All EA 1
Except
V18
7240-00-177-6154 SPOUT: can, gasoline, flex, w/filter
screen. 2-1/4 in. outside diameter,
16 in. long (19207) 11677020
V18 EA 1
TA 093195
C-4 Change 1
Page 309
TM 9-2320-272-10
APPENDIX D
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
INTRODUCTION
D-1. Scope.
This appendix lists expendable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain
M939 series trucks.
D-2. Explanation of Columns.
a. Item Number. This number is assigned to each entry in the listing.
b. Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the
listed item. Codes used in this column are:
C — Operator/ Crew
O — Organizational Maintenance Personnel
c. National Stock Number. This is the national stock number assigned an item. Use
this number to request or requisition that item.
d. Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required, a description to
identify the item. The last line for each item listing indicates the part number and the
Federal supply code for manufacturer (FSCM) in parenthesis. For FSCM codes and
abbreviations used, refer to appendix B on preceding pages, as required.
e. Unit of Measure (VI M). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual
maintenance function. This measure is expressed by an abbreviation (such as EA (each),
OZ (ounce), GAL (gallon)). If the unit of measure differs from the unit of issue,
requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy the requirements.
TA 090364
D-1
Page 310
TM 9-2320-272-10
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
ITEM LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NO.
DESCRIPTION U/M
NO.
6830-00-264-6751 ACETYLENE, TECHNICAL: gas filled
acetylene (to be refilled locally). 1-C 2175
(80244)
1 O 8120-00-285-4763 225 CU. FT. CYLINDER CU.
FT.
ANTIFREEZE: PERMANENT ETYHLENE
GLYCOL (-65° F) INHIBITED (O-A-548,
type I)
2 C 6850-00-243-1992 1 GAL CONTAINER GAL
3 c 6850-00-224-8730 5 GAL CONTAINER GAL
4 c 6850-00-243-1990 55 GAL DRUM GAL
ANTIFREEZE: PERMANENT TYPE;
ARCTIC GRADE (-90° F) (0-1-490)
(MIL-C- 11755)
5 c 6850-00-174-1806 55 GAL DRUM GAL
GREASE, AUTOMOTIVE AND ARTIL
LERY GAA (M1L-G- 10924)
6 c 9150-00-065-0029 2Va OZ TUBE OZ
7 c 9150-00-935-1017 14 OZ CARTRIDGE OZ
8 c 9150-00-190-0904 1 LB CAN LB
9 c 9150-00-190-0905 5 LB CAN LB
10 c 9150-00-190-0907 35 LB CAN LB
11 c 9150-00-190-7369 120 LB DRUM LB
INHIBITOR: CORROSION, LIQUID
COOLING SYSTEM; POWDER FORM
12 c 6850-00-753-4967 6 OZ CAN OZ
OIL. FUEL, DIESEL DF-2, REGULAR
(VV-F-800)
13 c 9150-00-286-5295 5 GAL CAN GAL
14 c 9150-00-286-5296 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
15 c 9150-00-286-5297 55 GAL DRUM, 18 GAGE GAL
16 c 9150-00-286-5294 BULK
TA 092417
D-2 Change 1
Page 311
TM 9-2320-272-10
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)
ITEM
NO.
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NO.
DESCRIPTION U/M
OIL, FUEL, DIESEL DF-1, WINTER
(VV-F-800)
17 C 9150-00-286-5287 5 GAL DRUM GAL
18 C 9150-00-286-5288 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
19 C 9150-00-286-5289 55 GAL DRUM, 18 GAGE GAL
20 c 9150-00-286-5286 BULK GAL
OIL, FUEL, DIESEL DF-A (ARCTIC)
21 c 9150-00-286-5282 5 GAL DRUM GAL
22 c 9150-00-286-5284 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
23 c 9150-00-286-5285 55 GAL DRUM, 18 GAGE GAL
24 c 9150-00-286-5283 BULK GAL
OIL, LUBRICATING, ENGINE, ARCTIC
(Ice, sub-zero) OEA (MIL-L^6167)
25 c 9150-00-402-4478 1 QT CAN QT
26 c 9150-00-402-2372 5 GAL CAN GAL
27 c 9150-00-491-7197 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
OIL, LUBRICATING, EXPOSED GEAR,
CW (VV-L-75I)
28 c 9150-00-234-5197 5 LB CAN LB
29 c 9150-00-261-7891 35 LB PAIL LB
LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR, MULTI
PURPOSE, GO 80/90 (MIL-L-2105)
30 c 9150-01-035-5392 1 QT CAN QT
31 c 9150-01-035-5393 5 GAL DRUM GAL
32 c 9150-01-035-5394 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
TA 0924 18
Change 1 D-3
Page 312
TM 9-2320-272-10
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)
ITEM
NO.
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NO.
DESCRIPTION U/M
LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR MULTI
PURPOSE. GO 75 (MIL-L-10324)
33 C 9150-01-035-5390 1 QT CAN QT
34 C 9150-01-035-5391 5 GAL DRUM GAL
OIL, LUBRICATING, OE/HDO 10
(M1L-L-2I04)
35 c 9150-00-189-6727 1 QT CAN QT
36 c 9150-00-186-6668 5 GAL DRUM GAL
37 c 9150-00-265-9429 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
38 c 9150-00-191-2772 55 GAL DRUM, 18 GAGE GAL
39 c 9150-00-753-4763 BULK GAL
OIL, LUBRICATING, OE/HDO 30
(M1L-L-2I04)
40 c 9150-00-186-6681 1 QT CAN QT
41 c 9150-00-188-9558 5 GAL DRUM GAL
42 c 9150-00-188-9859 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL
43 c 9150-00-189-6729 55 GAL DRUM, 18 GAGE GAL
44 c 9150-00-753-4764 BULK GAL
OXYGEN, TECHNICAL
45 0 6310-00-272-0123 220-240 CU. FT. CYLINDER CU.
FT.
SOLVENT. DRYCLEANING SD (P-D-680)
46 c 6850-00-664-5685 1 QT CAN QT
47 c 6850-00-281-1985 1 GAL CAN GAL
METHYL ALCOHOL. METHANOL
48 o 6810-00-597-3608 1 GAL CAN GAL
49 0 6810-00-275-6010 5 GAL CAN GAL
TA 0924 19
D-4 Change 1
Page 313
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX
Para Page
A
A-frame kit:
General 2-30a 2-156
Operation 2-30c 2-156
Preparation for use 2-30b 2-156
Preventive maintenance service 2-8 2-64
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-25
After operation:
In dusty or sandy areas 2-37 2-168
In extreme cold 2-34 2-160
In extreme heat 2-36 2-166
In mud 2-39 2-170
In rainy or humid areas 2-38 2-169
In salt water 2-40 2-171
In snow 2-35 2-164
Service 2-8 2-37
Air brake hand control kit:
General 2-32a 2-158
Operation 2-32b 2-158
Air cleaner service 3-IOt 3-31
Air reservoirs:
Final inspection 3-1 Ic 3-33
General 3-1 la 3-33
Preventive maintenance 2-8 2-44
Service 3-1 lb 3-33
Approach angle (see table 1-3) 1-12 1-20
Arctic kit (-65° F/-55°C):
General 2-29a 2-149
Operating engine compartment cover 2-29b 2-149
Operation, fuel-burning engine coolant heater 2-29d 2-152
Operation, fuel-burning personnel heater 2-29c 2-150
Preventive maintenance 2-8 2-65
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-20
Assembly and preparation for use 2-2 2-1
Authorized forms 1-2 1-2
B
Basic issue items B-6 B-3
Before operation check:
A-frame kit 2-8 2-64
In extreme cold 2-34b 2-160
In extreme heat 2-36b 2-166
In mud 2-39a 2-170
In salt water areas , 2-40b 2-171
In snow 2-35a 2-164
Before operation service under normal conditions 2-8 2-37
Bow, curtains, and body paulin installation 2-28a 2-142 g
Brake system:
Preventive maintenance 2-8 2-53
Releasing spring brake (emergency) 3-15 3-39
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-9
TA 092420
Change 1 INDEX 1
Page 314
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
C
Cab controls 2-3 2-2
Cab top:
Installation 2-18 2-82
Removal 2-18 2-82
Capacities (see table 1-5) 1-12 1-22
Cargo bodv paulin:
■ Installation 2-28a 2-142
Raising 2-28b 2-145
Removal 2-28c 2-145
Cargo trucks (M923, M924. M925, M926, M927. M928):
Body equipment controls and indicators 2-4c 2-19
■ Bow and tarp kit installation 2-28 2-142
Chassis controls and indicators 2-3 2-2
Chassis dimensions (see table 1-3) 1-12 1-20
Cold weather kit (-25° F/-32°C):
General 2-29a 2-149
Operation 2-29 2-149
Preventive maintenance services 2-8 2-65
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-20
Controls and instruments:
Dump truck (M929. M930) 2-3. 2-2.
2-4b 2-17
Front winch controls 2-19 2-84
Heater (-25° F/-32°C) 2-3 2-2
Heater (-65° F/ -55° C) 2-5d 2-30
Heater, engine coolant 2-29d 2-152
Instrument panel instruments and controls 2-3 2-2
Coolant surge tank 2-3 2-10
Crane. M936:
Controls 2-4a 2-13
General 2-2 la 2-94
Operation 2-2ld 2-100
Rig the load 2-2 1 c 2-97
Securing crane alter operation 2-2 1 f 2-108
D
Deep water lording kit:
General 2-26a 2-138
Operation 2-26c 2-139
Preparation for fording 2-26b 2-138
Preventive maintenance service 2-8 2-66
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-20
Destruction to prevent enemy use A-2 A-1
Differences between models (see table I- 1 1) 1-12 1-26
Dimensions (see table I -I) 1-12 1-18
Driving:
In extreme cold 2-34 2-160
In extreme heat 2-36 2-166
In mud 2-39 2-170
TA 092421
INDEX 2 Change 1
Page 315
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
In salt water areas 2-40 2-171
In sandy or dusty areas 2-37 2- 1 68
In snow 2-35 2-164
Placing and sustaining vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72
Dump trucks (M929. M930):
Chassis controls and instruments 2-3 2-2
Body equipment controls and indicators 2-4h 2-17
Operation 2-22 2-110
E
Electric hrake kit:
General 2-3 la 2-157
Operation 2-3 1 2-157
Emergency procedure tor stopping engine 2-14 2-76
Emergency service (radiator tan clutch) 3-16 3-40
End curtain, cargo bodv:
Installation - 2-28a 2-142 ■
Removal 2-28c 1-145
Engine and radiator data (see table 1-8) 1-12 1-24
Engine oil level (PMCS) 2-8 2-48
Engine service:
Air cleaner 3- 1 01 3-31
Air reservoirs 3-11 3-33
Coolant surge tank 3- 10c 3-29
Fuel filter 3-l0e 3-29
General 3-10a 3-28
Oil level 3-1 0b 3-28
F
Fording operation 2-26c 2-139
Forms and records:
Authorized forms 1-2 1-2
Report of errors, omissions, and recommendations I -2b 1-2
Front winch:
Controls 2-3 2-8
Operation 2-19 2-84
Preparation for use 2- 19a 2-84
Fuel system:
Filter service 3-10e 3-29
Fuels, permissible (see table 1-5) 1-12 1-22
G
Gaging tires 3-l4h 3-38
General service data (see table 1-6) 1-12 1-23 ■
H
Heater, engine coolant:
Operating 2-29d 2-152
Shutting down 2-29<l 2-152
Starting 2-29tl 2-15?
Heater, personnel (-65° F -55°C):
Operating 2-29c 2-150
Shutting down 2-29e 2-150
Starting 2-2* 2-150
TA 092422
Change 1 INDEX 3
Page 316
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Hood, vehicle cab:
General , 2- 17a 2-81
Raising and securing hood ; 2- 1 7b 2-81
Induction system, air:
Air cleaner service 3-1 Of 3-31
Instrument panel:
Controls and indicators 2-3 2-2
K
Kit. A-frame:
Before operation 2-30b 2-156
General 2-30a 2-156
Operation 2-30c 2-156
Preventive maintenance service 2-8 2-64
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-25
Kit. air brake hand control:
General 2-32a 2-158
Operation 2-32b 2-158
Kit. arctic (-65° F -55°C)
Controls 2-5d 2-29
General 2-29 2-149
Operation 2-29b-d 2-149
Preventive maintenance services 2-8 2-65
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-20
Kit. deep water fording:
General 2-26a 2-138
Operation 2-26b 2-138
Preventive maintenance services 2-8 2-66
Troubleshooting 3-8 3-20
Kit, electric brake:
General 2-3 la 2-157
Operating 2-3lb.c 2-157
Kit. troopseat and paulin (M929. M930):
Operation 2-27 2-141
L
Lowering windshield 2-18 2-82
Lubrication:
| General information under usual conditions 3-6 3-1.1
Lubrication information, detailed (see LO 9-2320-272-12):
Engine oil 3-10b 3-28
Lubrication interval 3-5a 3-1
Lubrication points (see LO 9-2320-272-12) 3-5b 3-1
Lubrication reports and records 3-5c 3-1
| Lubrication under unusual conditions 3-6 3-1.1
M
Maximum road speed (see table 1-9) 1-12 1-24
Metric svstem Inside back cover
O
Oil level, engine 2-8 2-48
Oil seal and gasket leakage 2-9 2-38
Operating precautions 2-10 2-67
TA 092423
INDEX 4 Change 1
Page 317
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Operating vehicle:
Driving in reverse 2- 13m 2-75
Driving vehicle 2-13 2-72
Parking vehicle 2-14 2-76
Placing vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72
Stopping vehicle 2-14 2-76
Operation:
A-frame 2-30c 2-156
Air brake hand control 2-32b 2-158
Arctic kit (-65° F/ -55° C) 2-29 2-149
Auxiliary equipment 2-25 2-137
Cold weather kit (-25°F/-32°C) 2-29 2-149
Deep water fording kit 2-26 2-138
Dump truck (M929, M930) 2-22 2-110
Electric brake 2-31 2-157
Front winch 2-19 2-84
In dusty or sandy areas 2-37 2-168
In extreme cold 2-34 2-160
In extreme heat 2-36 2-166
In mud • 2-39 2-170
In rainy or humid areas 2-38 2-169
In salt water 2-40 2-171
In snow 2-35 2-164
Liftgate 2-24d 2-122
Medium wrecker (M936) 2-21 2-94
Rear winch 2-21c 2-94
Slave receptacle 2-15 2-78
Tractor (M931, M932) 2-23 2-115
Truck, cargo (M923, M924. M925. M926. M927. M928) 2-20 • 2-90
Van(M934. M935) 2-24 2-122
Wrecker crane (M936) 2-2 Id 2-100
Operation in dusty or sandy areas:
At halt or parking 2-37c 2-168
General 2-37a 2-168
Placing vehicle in motion 2-37b 2-168
Operation in extreme cold:
At halt or parking 2-34a.b 2-160
Before operation 2-34b 2-160
Driving vehicle 2-34d 2-161
General 2-34a 2-160
Starting engine 2-34c 2-160
Operation in extreme heat:
At halt or parking 2-36b 2-166
General 2-36a 2-166
Operation in mud:
After operation 2-39c 2-170
Driving vehicle 2-39b 2-170
General 2-39a 2-170
Operation in salt water areas:
After operation 2-40d 2-172
General 2-40a 2-171
TA 090372
INDEX 5
Page 318
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Operation in salt water 2-40c 2-171
Preparation tor lording 2-40b 2-171
Operation in snow:
Alter operation 2-35c 2-165
Driving vehicle 2-35b 2-164
General 2-35a 2-164
Operation of crane (M936):
Controls 2-4a 2-13
General 2-2 la 2-94
Operation 2-2 Id 2-100
Securing crane alter operation 2-2 1 f 2-108
Towing 2-2 le 2-106
Operation of dump truck (M929. M930):
Controls 2-4b 2-17
Description 1-8 1-10
General 2-22 2-110
Regular operation 2-22b 2-111
Rocker operation 2-22c 2-112
Spreader operation 2-22d 2-113
Operation ol front winch:
Controls 2-3 2-6
General 2-19 2-84
Operation 2-19d 2-86
Operation of medium wrecker (M936):
Description I - 1 0 1-14
General 2-2 la 2-94
Operation 2-20b-d 2-94
Operation of rear winch (M936):
Controls 2-4a 2-13
General 2-2lc 2-94
Operation 2-21c 2-94
Operation of tractor (M931. M932):
Coupling trailer 2-23c 2-116
Description 1-9 1-12
General 2-23a 2-115
Uncoupling trailer 2-23d 2-119
Wedge adjustment 2-23b 2-115
Operation of truck, cargo (M923. M924. M925. M926. M927. M928):
Cargo loading (dropsides) I -5b. 1-4.
2-20f 2-92
Cargo loading (fixed sides) 1 -6b. 1-7.
2-20 2-90
■ Curtain installation 2-28a 2-142
Curtain removal 2-28c 2-145
I General 2-28 2-142
Paulin installation 2-28a 2-142
Paulin removal 2-28c 2-145
Raising paulin 2-28b 2-145
Troopseat operation 2-20c 2-90
TA 092424
INDEX 6 Change 1
Page 319
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Operation of van (M934, M935):
Air conditioner operation 2-24h 2-130
Blackout operation -. 2-2li 2-131
Description 1-1 1 1-16
Expanding bodv 2-24c 2-1-24
General 2-24a 2-122
Heater operation 2-24g 2-129
Liftgate operation 2-24d. 2-122.
2-24j 2-132
Operating site selection 2-24b 2-122
Retracting body 2-41 k 2-133
Operator preventive maintenance service (tabic 2-2) 2-8 2-39
P
Parking vehicle:
In dusty or sandy areas 2-37c 2-168
In extreme cold 2-34e 2-161
In extreme heat 2-36d 2-168
Usual conditions 2-14 2-76
Paulin. bows and troopseats:
Bow, curtains and body paulin installation 2-2Sa 2-142 I
Cab paulin installation 2-l8n 2-83
Removing cab top and lowering windshield 2-18 2-82
Side rack and troopseat installation (cargo) 2-20 2-90
Side rack and troopseat removal 2-20a 2-90
Side rack and troopseat installation (dump) 2-27 2-141
Paulin. cargo bodv:
Installation 2-28a 2-142 I
Raising 2-28b 2-145
Removal 2-28c 2-145
Placing vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72
Placing vehicle in motion in sandy areas 2-37b 2-168
Preparation for starting engine 2-11 2-67
Preparation for use 2-2 2-1
Preparations for fording 2-26b 2-138
Preventive maintenance checks and services (see table 2-2) 2-8 2-39
R
Radiator fan clutch emergency service 3-16 3-40
Rear winch:
Controls 2-4a 2-13
Operation 2-2 lc 2-94
References A- 1 A- 1
Releasing spring brake (emergency) 3-15 3-39
Reporting materiel failures 1 -2b 1-2
Reservoirs, air:
Final inspection 3-1 lc 3-33
General 3-1 la 3-33
Service 3-1 lb 3-33
S
Scope:
Manual 1-1 1-'
TA 092425
Change 1 INDEX 7
Page 320
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Service upon receipt of materiel 2-2 2-1
Side rack and troopseat:
Installation 2-20e 2-92
Removal 2-20d 2-91
Slave receptacle:
General 2-15 2-78
Operation 2-15 2-78
Troubleshooting 3-8
Using to start engine 2-15 2-78
Special purpose kits 2-25 2-137
Special tools and equipment 3-1 3-1
Starting engine:
In extreme cold 2-34 2-160
Preparation for starting 2-8 2-39
Starting (above +32° F/+0°C) 2-11 2-67
Starting (below +32° F/+0°C) 2-12 2-70
Using slave receptacle to start engine 2-15 2-78
Steering system:
Reservoir service 3-10 3-29
Stopping engine:
Emergency procedure 2-14g 2-77
Normal procedure 2-14 2-76
Stopping vehicle 2-14 2-76
Tables:
1-1 — Vehicle Dimensions 1-12 1-18
1-2 — Weights 1-12 1-19
1-3 — Chassis Dimensions 1-12 1-20
1-4 — Shipping Dimensions 1-12 1-21
1-5 — Capacities for Normal Operating Conditions 1-12 1-22
| i_6 _ General Service Data 1-12 1-23
1_7 _ Tire Inflation Data 1-12 1-23
1-8 — Engine and Radiator Data 1-12 1-24
1-9 — Automatic Transmission Data 1-12 1-24
1-10 — Winch and Crane Data 1-12 1-25
1- 11 — Differences Between Models 1-12 1-26
2- 1 — General Cleaning Instructions 2-7 2-36
2-2 — Operator and Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks Service . 2-8 2-39
2-3 — Typical Material Weights 2-22 2-110
2-4 — M939 Series Special Purpose Kits 2-25 2-137
3- 1 — Troubleshooting 3-8 3-3
Basic issue items list B-3
Additional authorization list C-1
Expendable supplies and materials list D-2
Tank coolant surge 2-3, 2-10,
3- 10c 3-29
Tarpaulin and troopseat kit (dump truck):
Operation 2-27 2-141
Tire inflation:
Gaging tire 3- 14b 3-38
General 3- 14a 3-38
TA 092426
* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1983-654-002/4014
INDEX 8 Change 1
Page 321
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Inflating tire 3- 14c 3-38
Pressures (see table 1-7) 1-12 1-23
Towing vehicle:
With wrecker 2-2 1 e 2-106
Tractor (M931, M932):
Controls and instruments 2-4d 2-20
Operation 2-23 2-115
Troubleshooting (table 3-1):
A-frame kit 3-8 3-25
Brakes 3-8 3-9
Clutch, transmission and transfer 3-8 3-7
Controls and instruments 3-8 3-12
Deep water fording kit 3-8 3-20
Dump body hoist assembly 3-8 3-12
Engine 3-8 3-3
Fifth wheel assembly 3-8 3-12
Fuel-burning personnel and engine coolant heaters 3-8 3-21
Hot water personnel heater 3-8 3-6
Hydraulic crane 3-8 3-14
Van, auxiliary equipment 3-8 3-17
Wheels, tires and suspension .- 3-8 3-10
V
Van (M934, M935):
Air conditioner operation 2-24h 2-130
Blackout operations 2-24i 2-131
Controls and instruments 2-4e 2-21
Expanding body 2-24e 2-124
Heater operation 2-24g 2-129
Leveling body 2-24c 2-122
Liftgate operation (M935) 2-24d. 2-122,
2-24j 2-132
Operating site selection 2-24b 2-122
Retracting body 2-24k 2-133
Setting up instructions 2-24 2-122
W
Wedges, adjustment (fifth wheel) 2-23b 2-1 15
Weight, vehicle and payload (see table 1-2) 1-12 1-19
Wheels and tires:
General 3- 13a 3-34
Removal 3- 1 3c 3-35
Replacement 3- 13d 3-37
Spare tire removal 3- 1 3b 3-34
Winch:
Front 2-19 2-84
Rear 2-2 Ic 2-94
Windshield lowering 2-18 2-82
Wrecker, medium (M936):
Controls and instruments 2-4a 2-13
Description 1-10 1-14
General 2-21a 2-94
Operation of crane 2-2 Id 2-100
TA 090376
INDEX 9
Page 322
TM 9-2320-272-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para Page
Operation ol front winch 2-19 2-84
Operation of rear winch 2-21c 2-94
Towing 2-2le 2-106
TA 090377
*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1962—554-002/78
INDEX 10
Page 323
TM 9-2320-272-10
TO 36A12-1C-441
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force:
Official:
E. C.MEYER
General, United States Army
Chief ofStaff
ROBERT M. JOYCE
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Official:
CHARLES A. GABRIEL, General, USAF
Chief of Staff
JAMES E. WYATT, JR., Colonel, USAF
Director ofAdministration
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38, Operator Maintenance
Requirements for Tri ck, 5 -Ton 6x6, M939 Series (Diesel) .
Page 325
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
WITH THIS PUBLICATION?
THEN. . JOT DOWN THE
DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS
FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT
OUT, FOLD IT AND DROP IT
IN THE MAIL'
FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADORESS)
DATE SENT
PUBLICATION NUMBER
TM 9-2320-272-10
PUBLICATION OATE PUBLICATION TITLE
Truck, 5-Ton, 6x6, M939 Series
(Diesel)
BE EXACT. PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS
PAGE
NO.
PARA
GRAPH
FIGURE
NO.
TABLE
NO.
IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG
ANO WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:
PRINTED NAME. GRADE OR TITLE. ANO TELEPHONE NUMBER SIGN HERE:
PREVIOUS EDITIONS
ARE OBSOLETE.P.S.-IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR
RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS
AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS.
Page 326
REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028-2
Commander
US Army Tank -Automotive Command
ATTN: DRSTA-MB
Warren, Michigan 48090
Page 327
THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS
LINEAR MEASURE
I Centimeter = 10 Millimeters = 0.0 1 Meters = 0.3937 Inches
I Meter = 100 Centimeters = 1.000 Millimeters = 39.37 Inches
1 Kilometer = 1.000 Meters = 0.621 Miles
WEIGHTS
I Gram = 0.001 Kilograms = 1 .000 Milligrams = 0.035 Ounces
I Kilogram = 1.000 Cirams = 2.2 Lb
I Metric Ton = 1.000 Kilograms = 1 Megagram I 1 Short
Tons
LIQUID MEASURE
I Milliliter = 0.001 Liters = 0.0338 Fluid Ounces
I Liter = l.(XK) Milliliters = 33.82 Fluid Ounces
SQUARE MEASURE
I Sq Centimeter - 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inches
I Sq Meter = 10.000 Sq Centimeters = 10.76 Sq Feet
I Sq Kilometer = 1.000.000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Miles
CUBIC MEASURE
1 Cu Centimeter = 1.000 Cu Millimeters = 0.06 Cu Inches
I Cu Meter = 1 .000.(XX) Cu Centimeters = 35.31 Cu Feet
TEMPERATURE
5 9 ( F -32) = C
212 Fahrenheit is equivalent to I(X) Celsius
40 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2 Cesius
32 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0 Celsius
4 5 C »32 F
APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS
TO CHANGE TO
Inches Centimeters
Feet Meters
Yards Meter,
Miles Kilometers
Square Inches Square Centimeters
Square Feet Square Meters
Square Yards Square Meters
Square Miles Square Kilometers
Acres Square Hectometers
Cubic Feet Cubic Meters
Cubic Yards Cubic Meters
Fluid Ounces Milliliters
Pints I Hers
Quarts I Hers
Gallons I iters
Ounces Grams
Pounds Kilograms
Short Ions Metric I ons
Pound-Feet Newton-Meters
Pounds Per Square Inch Kilopascals
Miles Per Gallon Kilometers Per I iter
Miles Per Hour Kilometers Per Hour
TO CHANGE TO
Centimeters Inches
Meters Feet
Meters Yards
Kilometers Miles
Square Centimeters Square Inches
Square Meters Square Feet
Square Meters Square \ ards
Square Kilometers Square Miles
Square Hectometers Acres
Cubic Meters Cubic Feet
Cubic Meters Cubic Yards
Milliliters Fluid Ounces
Liters Pints
Liters Quarts
Liters Gallons
Grams Ounces
Kilograms Pounds
Metric Tons Short Tons
Newton-Meters Pound-Feet
Kilopascals Pounds Per Square Inch
Kilometers Per Liter Miles Per Gallon
Kilometers Per Hour Miles Per Hour
MULTIPLY BY
2 540
0 305
0 914
1 609
6 451
0 093
0 836
2 590
0.405
0 028
0 765
29 573
0 471
0 946
1 785
2K 149
II 454
0 907
1 <56
6.895
0 42">
1 609
MULTIPLY BY
0.394
3.280
1.094
0.621
0.155
10 764
I 196
0.386
2.471
35.315
1.308
0.034
2.113
1.057
0.264
0.035
2.205
1.102
0.738
0.145
2.354
0.621
O -3
I—z
SO